JP6959554B2 - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding pachinko gaming machines.

Currently, the most popular pachinko gaming machines are called "special symbols" (or main gaming symbols) on the 7-segment display when the gaming ball enters the start chucker. When the symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the special gaming state is more profitable for the player than the normal gaming state. This is a type of model (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game in which (a so-called attacker) opens up under predetermined conditions. Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol that is directly linked to the interests of the player, it is referred to as a "decorative symbol" for directing to enhance the interest of the game, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbol". The symbol to be displayed is variablely displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal display having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol. Then, when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change in accordance with this, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also in a predetermined mode (for example, "7") accordingly. It will stop at "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is confirmed because the decorative symbol is stopped in the predetermined mode.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise a high degree of interest in the overall production including the variation mode of the design. The focus is on whether to grant. For example, the variable display "decorative pattern" is temporarily stopped and then restarted, or the variable display "decorative pattern" is hidden and a highly interesting moving image is displayed instead. One of them is a method of improving the interest of the game by such a directing method.

JP-A-2014-014494 JP-A-2014-014576 JP-A-2014-039745 JP 2014-079281

However, since such a production method has been widely used in the past, there is a problem that the control method needs to be further improved in order to improve the interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production,
With the sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
With
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information,
The first identification information display control means that controls the first identification information display unit to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information,
A second identification information display control means that controls the second identification information display unit to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player,
A game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
With
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
With
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, it is possible to update the display of the second reserved number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information.
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit, the final display mode of the first effect symbol can be displayed on the effect display unit.
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit, the final display mode of the second effect symbol can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate with the second effect symbol.
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. The display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is irrespective of the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. It is configured so that after displaying a certain type of the specified display mode among a plurality of predetermined types of the specified display mode, the display mode can be switched to a different type of the specified display mode from the certain type of the specified display mode.
It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by this.
<Additional notes>
In addition, although other aspects different from this aspect are listed below, it is possible to carry out without any limitation.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this other aspect is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that the control method of the image display corresponding to the gaming situation can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of an electric accessory drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of a special game operating condition determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of determining the drawing stop symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is an image diagram of a display mode of a decorative symbol on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is an example of a decorative symbol effect table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a special game-related display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transparent effect execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of a random number acquisition process for determining the main game content on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the second main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the pre-reading hold content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol reservation content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a second main game advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a look-ahead determination process at the time of winning the first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the change example 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is an image diagram of a pending change in a specific advance notice effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a hold digestion transmission image display process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image change image of a reserved digestion transmission image on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a specific game end determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during the time saving on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of a right-handed instruction display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to a display area of a decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to a variable display period of decorative symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram of a decorative symbol used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to a stop display mode of a decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to a hold display for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to the erasure of the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operation diagram of a distribution member unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative symbol display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of a hold change display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is an image diagram of a hold occurrence display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image diagram of a hold digestion display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a reserved passage route in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of a look-ahead determination process at the time of winning the first main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a pre-reading determination process at the time of winning a second main game on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a table for determining the content of the first decorative symbol effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol production content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the pre-reading display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is an image diagram of a stop symbol display at the time of a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an image diagram of an interrupt effect execution in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a table for determining the content of the first decorative symbol effect on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a screen display during fluctuation standby in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a screen display of volume adjustment or light amount adjustment in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a screen display during normal fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a screen display during SP reach in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a transition of updating the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of holdings and the probability that the first decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the hitting method warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a diagram showing the relationship between the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed during the look-ahead effect display and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed during the fluctuation of the trigger fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power off (not the RAM clear) and the decorative symbol after the power is turned off and restored in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power off (RAM clear) and the decorative symbol after the power is turned off and restored in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the relationship between the reach voice and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a display mode of a decorative symbol in a full rotation effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing a variation mode of a decorative symbol for each stage in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the display contents of the decorative symbol during fluctuation in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the re-variation is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and a super reach effect is produced in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, in which a development symbol is displayed corresponding to a notice type and a super reach effect is produced. FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when a super reach effect is obtained when different display modes are used among the same notice types. FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when different look-ahead effects are performed to obtain a super reach effect. FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to obtain a super reach effect. FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment when developing into the same super reach effect via different displays. FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into a super reach effect via a button effect in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is obtained in different effect stages in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when re-variation is executed in different production stages in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 154 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. "Prize ball" includes not only a prize in which a prize ball is paid out, but also a passage to a "through chucker" in which a prize ball is not paid out. The "open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), the open state = easy winning state, and the closed state = non-winning state. It will be in an easy state. Further, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter, may be referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter, referred to as an evacuation state). In a configuration that can take (there is) (so-called tongue-type attacker), the advance state = the winning easy state, and the evacuation state = the winning non-easy state. A "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard random number). Random numbers, soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "winning random number (random number for winning / failing lottery)" related to the transition of the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol are determined. "Random number for determining variable mode", "Random number for determining stop symbol", "Random number for determining winning symbol" for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variable game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all of these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, and the like, and at least one random number that is the same as or different from each other may be used. Further, in the present specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once the entry port (for example, the start entry port) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as winning random number + fluctuation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number). .. Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The "gaming state" is, for example, a transition to a special gaming state in which the large winning opening can be opened, a transition to a special gaming state rather than a non-probability variable gaming state in which the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high probability of lottery, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize at the start port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal symbol time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the start port In some cases, it is any one or a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short time of notifying the result of the opening lottery of the variable member). The "variable display stop time" is the time for holding the identification information in a stopped state when the variable display of the identification information is stopped, and when the hold remains after the variable display is stopped, this variable display stop time is used. After that, the fluctuation related to the remaining hold is started (the fluctuation start condition and the pass / fail judgment permission condition are satisfied). The "directing symbol" is a display image of a kind called a decorative symbol or a decorative symbol, and typically, a number, a symbol, or the like is described on an image object such as a card type. Then, by finally stopping and displaying the image object on the effective line with a combination in which the numbers and symbols are the same, it is notified that a big hit has occurred. The "first production symbol" and the "second production symbol" are both "production symbols", but each of them is configured to be able to independently notify the occurrence of a big hit. (For example, the "first production symbol" becomes "777" and the occurrence of a big hit can be notified, and the "second production symbol" becomes "777" and the occurrence of a big hit can be notified. But also). The "variation mode" is, for example, the fluctuation time (including the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the fluctuation time of the production symbol, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the scroll display of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol on the spot. It includes rotation (these are sometimes referred to as "switching display modes") and the like. "Temporarily stop (or temporarily stop) / do not stop the production symbol" is synonymous with "temporarily stop → re-variate" as one set, and perform / do not perform this one set. be. "Re-variation" means a situation such as "temporarily stop the production symbol → re-variate", a situation such as "start fluctuation-> temporarily stop the production symbol", and "re-variation start-> production symbol". Is a term that includes situations such as "temporarily stop the production (temporary stop after the second time)". After that, the hit symbol is displayed and stopped). It is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, after that, the stop display is definitively displayed together with the stop display of the so-called special symbol) for notifying the presence or absence of a big hit. In addition, the "design for production" is based on the first element (for example, numbers), and the second element (for example, color) and the third element (presence / absence / content of incidental information such as characters and "SUPER") are displayed. It may be configured as an accessory. Further, when the effect modes are different, the "effect symbol" may be configured so that the first element is the same or the second element and / or the third element are different. In addition, due to the difference between the second element and / or the third element, the degree of expectation that the reach fluctuation will be a big hit, and the expectation that the symbol fluctuation related to the pre-reading effect when a specific symbol combination is stopped when the pre-reading effect is executed will be a big hit. The profit margin for the player, such as the number of rounds at the time of a big hit and the game state after the big hit, may be different. Further, in such a configuration, in the case of the probability-variable gaming state, the time-shortening gaming state, etc., the second element and / or the third element is the player as compared with the case of the normal gaming state. It may be configured to be an advantageous factor for the user. Further, the "information display unit" displays information including a notice effect and the like, and is, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be indicated as a single unit. However, a combination of a plurality of display media (the entire unit) such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp may be shown. Further, the "effect display unit" is for displaying an effect including a notice effect, for example, an effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be indicated individually. However, a combination of a plurality of display media (the entire unit) such as an effect display device + a 7-segment LED + an LED lamp may be shown.

The following embodiment is a model (type 1 type 1 multifunction device) in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also within the range when applied to other gaming machines (for example, conventional pachinko gaming machines of type 1, type 2, type 3, general electric service, etc.). .. It should be noted that this embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function where each means exists, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for the process of each step, and the like. It is not limited to the following aspects. Further, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be limitedly understood to be applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are described independently. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and the other modified example is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limited, and the lottery table may be used as a reference table or vice versa.

Here, a concise configuration according to the present invention will be described prior to the detailed description of the present invention.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the second decorative symbol is hidden or difficult to see in a situation where the first decorative symbol is hidden or difficult to see. A configuration for displaying a symbol (variable display) will be described in detail in (the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), a special symbol and a specific roll (a roll consisting of only numbers) are generated at the temporary stop timing of the middle row at the time of executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation. The configuration changed so that it can be temporarily stopped will be described in detail in (Example 1 of change from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the later the temporary stop timing is {or the number of pseudo consecutive times within the fluctuation. (As the number of temporary stops in the middle row increases)}, the configuration changed so that the number of stop modes that can be temporarily stopped increases will be described in detail in (Example 2 of change from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a transparent effect is configured so that the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state and the accessory in the effect display device SG is visible, and the transparent effect is being executed. A configuration in which the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is executed even when the first decorative symbol is hidden will be described in detail in (Modification 3 from the present embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as decorative symbols, and is configured so that the look-ahead effect can be executed, and the special symbol is the final variation of the look-ahead effect (trigger hold). A configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of (variation related to) and can be stopped as a pseudo-continuous symbol of pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described in detail in (Second Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration of (second embodiment) is changed to a specific hold display mode when the hold change effect (effect of changing the hold display mode) based on the winning of the look-ahead lottery is executed. A configuration modified so as to provide a notice effect that is executed only when the above is performed will be described in detail in (Example 1 of modification from the second embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (second embodiment), the appearance rate of special symbols (pre-reading lottery winning rate and angel zone) is determined by the fluctuation of the first main game side and the fluctuation of the second main game side. The configuration changed so that the transition lottery winning rate) is different will be described in detail in (Example 2 of change from the second embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the time-reduced gaming state, one variation time of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for a plurality of variation times of the second decorative symbol (or the main game symbol). The configuration will be described in detail in (Third Embodiment).

Various configurations relating to the display mode, display position, display area, priority, etc. of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention are described in detail in (4th embodiment). explain.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which a display corresponding to two holds, a first hold display and a second hold display, is displayed on the effect display device (modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment). ) Will be explained in detail.

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a parallel lottery can be executed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is the first. (2) A configuration such as a decorative pattern will be described in detail in (Fifth Embodiment).

Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, a configuration in which the configuration relating to the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed is changed from the configuration of (fifth embodiment) is changed (change from the fifth embodiment). This will be described in detail in Example 1).

A configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in (Sixth Embodiment).

(The present embodiment)

Here, before explaining each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

First, with reference to FIG. 1, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine frames and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball plate D20, a lower ball plate D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body that matches the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching the game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball plate D20 has a mechanism for storing the game ball, sending the game ball to the launch rail, and extracting the game ball from the lower ball plate D22. The lower ball plate D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

Next, the game board is formed with a game area D30 partitioned by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10, 1st big winning opening C10, 2nd big winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out opening D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 includes a first main game start port entry ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start port entry detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information.

Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start port entry detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generates mouth ball information. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed to a closed state in which the game ball is hard to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than in the normal state.

Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and due to the presence of the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port A10 is present. The upper part of the game start port B10 is blocked. Further, both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are both the first main game start port A10. And it is configured to be guided to the second main game start port B10.

In the present embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the second main game start port B10 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the first main game start port A10 side. You may. Further, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to be vertically overlapped with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port is not limited to this. The A10 and the second main game start port B10 may be arranged so as to be separated from each other. In such a configuration, a member that closes the upper portion of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d may be provided. Further, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is less likely to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) may be configured so as to be difficult to be guided to the first main game start port A10, while being easily guided to the second main game start port B10. It should be noted that "easy to be guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined by, for example, the size of the number of balls entered when 10,000 balls are launched on the right side and the left side, respectively.

Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start opening ball entry detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start opening H10, and generates auxiliary game start opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start port H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30, respectively)}.

Next, on the upper right side of the out opening D36, the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and flow down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The game ball is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first special winning opening C10 and the second special winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

Next, the first big winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second major winning opening C20. As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening). It is provided with a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. The first large winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first large winning opening C10 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first large winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (the first). 1 The big winning opening solenoid C13 is excited to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape and is out, which is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the jackpot symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right side of the opening D36 and above the first large winning opening C10. Specifically, the second major winning opening C20 includes a second major winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second major winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second major winning opening). The mouth solenoid C23) is provided. Here, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry information indicating the entry at the time of entry. To generate. Then, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d has the second large winning opening C20 in a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second large winning opening C20 and in an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the large winning opening is changed to a normal state in which the game ball has a horizontal rectangular shape and the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. Not limited to. In that case, for example, an advance state in which the rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening is projected toward the player side and an evacuation state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side can be adopted (so-called so-called). It may be a tongue-type attacker), and is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes the displayed display. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game symbol display unit B21g. It is provided with a symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display unit A21h (second main game symbol hold display unit B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit is the first main game (second main game). Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers related to (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbol that has not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". It is displayed with 10 kinds of numbers of "" and "-" of the loss {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. Further, the holding number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and a maximum of four holding numbers can be displayed (for example, it is composed of one lamp and is held. Number 1: Lighting, Number of Holds 2: Blinking at low speed, Number of Holds 3: Blinking at medium speed, Number of Holds 4: Blinking at high speed).

Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have to have a directing role, in the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) itself has a directing role and the decorative symbol on the first main game side (decorative symbol on the second main game side) is not displayed. In this case, a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later may be configured to display the first main game symbol (second main game symbol).

Next, the effect display device SG executes display of an effect image including decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that fluctuate / stop in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. It is a device to do. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the variable display of the decorative symbol. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) that displays main game hold information, and, for example, a plurality of rows of decorative symbols (first decoration) that imitate a game of a slot machine. (Symbol and second decorative symbol) It has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying a moving image of fluctuation. Although the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display in this embodiment, it may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are interlocked with the hold lamps of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like related to the auxiliary game symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of reserved auxiliary game symbol changes (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes that have not been executed).

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. Further, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays a role of directing by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and controls the overall game operation (that is, the game, such as a lottery when the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10). The main control board M that performs control that is directly related to the interests of the pachinko machine, and the effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control related to various effects on the effect display device SG that gives interest to the game content. The SM, the sub-sub control unit SS that mainly executes the effect display, the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the prizes in each winning opening are placed on the upper ball plate D20. The prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with the payout unit KE10 and the like, the prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and the game ball (storage ball) of the upper ball plate D20 are played. The launching device D42 that launches one ball at a time to the area D30, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine. A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch for turning on / off, is provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the side opposite to the game side).

Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment pays out the game balls based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and the information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled and the main control board M. Sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are one board) that controls the execution of various effects, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc. (Arranged above) and a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub-control board S has various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), sound from the speaker D24, and lighting of the game effect lamp D26. , Sub-main control unit SM that controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display / stop display, hold display, and notice display of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) on the effect display device SG. It is provided with two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS to be executed. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, a ROM that stores in advance a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. It is equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores the data handled by the CPU (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.). Here, although not particularly shown, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured so as not to provide an unused area in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified by fraudulent activity. It is suitable (for example, all unused areas are filled with 0, used areas are packed in a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is used only for unused data (for example, data that is referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or for testing at the development stage). It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when using the RAM area, it is preferable to pack the area in a young address and use the area so that an unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, the schematic configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting port entry ball detection device A11s described above, the second main game start opening entry ball detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start opening entry ball detection device H11s, the first 1 large prize opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (not shown, the general winning opening is a entry opening that has a prize ball but does not draw a symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoid (not shown), drive solenoid (1st prize opening solenoid C13, 2nd prize opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., which are indispensable for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS), and the prize ball is paid out based on the progress of the game. Information (commands) related to the prize ball payout control board KH can be transmitted to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) related to the progress state of the production / game can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal by wiring. It is configured to be able to output game-related information to an external device.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub-main are configured. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between the control boards (between the control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes the payout of game balls, and a device that can be operated by the player and receives a game ball lending request to the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R for transmission. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, launching motor, ball feeding device) are provided. Etc.) are also connected. In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is separated from the game machine and adjacent to the game machine, but it may be integrated with the game machine. In that case, the game ball lending control board KH is used for lending. Control and management of recording media for lending electronic money and the like may be supervised.

Next, as described above, the sub-control board S includes an effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), a speaker D24, a game effect lamp D26, and other effects. It is connected to a drive device (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and the sub-main control unit SM controls the sound output from the speaker D24 and the game effect ( Illuminations) Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of the display content to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured in. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). It may be possible, but by configuring it to be integrated, there are merits such as space merit and reduction of the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring and the like). Further, the division of work between the two control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Further, the electronic value may be given without giving the physical prize ball as the prize ball.

Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H) related to the game. It is connected to the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM) related to the production and the prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes the image effect, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), the speaker D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to the prize ball payout device KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, the sub-main control unit SM (secondary game control means SM), the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), the prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It is composed of elements such as a ROM and RAM to be used, a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. It should be noted that each means included in the main control board M below may be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in the peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, details of each of the above means (devices) will be described.

First, the main control board M includes a game information control means MJ that controls the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the content of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP that controls, current and past game states [for example, states related to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variable game state, time shortened game state), special game state}, state related to auxiliary game (Easy open state, non-easy open state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to the main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game state during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Etc. temporarily stored in the game state temporary storage means MB and various game information on the game peripheral device side {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss} , Information transmission control means MT (and command transmission buffer for accumulating untransmitted commands) for transmitting information regarding the variation mode (for example, variation time), start signal / state information / end signal of special game, hold information, etc. It has MT10) and a prize ball payout determining means MH that controls a prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on winning of a game ball to various winning openings.

Here, the game information control means MJ determines the entry determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of the game ball into each entry port (starting port, etc.) and whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the determination result. Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing within the upper limit number of balls entering each start port during variable display as hold balls. doing. Further, the game progress means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for controlling the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol and the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10. The second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, the special game control means MP30 that controls the control related to the special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main. Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the player has a determination of which game state the current game state is to be transferred to, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the decision. doing. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start port A10, and a second main game start port. Second main game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10 Auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port entry determination means MJ11-B. The first major winning opening determination means MJ11-C10 and the second major winning opening C20, which determine whether or not a game ball has entered the first major winning opening C10, are used with the entry determination means MJ11-H. It has a second large winning opening ball entry determination means MJ11-C20, which determines whether or not a game ball has entered.

Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, and the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number according to the determination result. To the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start port B10. It is determined whether or not to acquire the second main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main) is determined according to the determination result. The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring the game symbol determination random number, etc., and the auxiliary game for determining whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result. It has a random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H.

Here, the scope of the claims including the above and the "random numbers" in the present specification are, for example, "0" to "65535" and "65535" assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a random number for determining a variation mode). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as "0" to "255". Further, the random number does not have to be a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo-random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the values are expressed in sequence along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), and the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed. ) Is determined by a random value (initial value update method), a combination thereof, and the like. By acquiring random numbers by such a method, it is possible to generate aperiodic random numbers that are difficult for the player to predict. On the contrary, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number by using the random number used for a certain lottery, the next random number is easily predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digestion control means MJ31 that controls the process related to the hold digestion and the start of the fluctuation, and the first main game side random number acquired in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the random number, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol change permission is given. -A and whether or not to temporarily store the second main game side random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol change permission has not been granted are determined, and the symbol change permission is granted for the random number based on the determination result. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game side random number acquired in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not given are temporarily stored. It is determined whether or not to memorize, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol change permission is given. Have.

Here, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction determining means MJ31j for determining whether or not the condition for starting the fluctuation is satisfied.

Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four random numbers, which are combined with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, respectively, for temporarily storing in the form of a random number. Have.

Next, the game content determination means MN decides whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory B11d can be opened is selected by the winning or losing lottery means MN10, and when the result of the winning or losing lottery is a hit, the special game is performed. (For example, the hit flag is turned on internally), the special game transition determination means MN20, the symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number. Based on the above, it has a variation mode determining means MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol. Here, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 includes the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A for performing the winning / failing lottery for the first main game symbol and the second main game winning / failing lottery means for performing the winning / losing lottery for the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for performing a winning / failing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a winning / losing lottery regarding the first main game symbol. The first main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game win / loss lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the win / loss lottery for the second main game symbol, and the win / loss lottery for the auxiliary game symbol. Each has a winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-H for auxiliary games, which is referred to when performing the above. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

Here, when executing the winning / failing lottery based on the main game random number, the winning / failing lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any of all the winning random numbers, or wins. When a part or all of the random number values are continuous numerical values, the hit / fail judgment is executed by determining whether or not the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the hit random number value and equal to or more than the lower limit value. .. By executing such a hit / fail judgment, an accurate judgment process can be executed. On the contrary, when the hit / fail judgment is executed by comparing only the upper limit of the hit random number range or only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023). Since it is necessary to set 1023) as a random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of passing a current through the main control board M, and all the bits of the storage area tend to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of getting rid of it. Further, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is executed), two random numbers are executed. Need to be prevented from synchronizing}.

Next, the symbol content determining means MN40 acquires the first main game symbol determining means MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determining random number (first main game random number). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B that determines the stop symbol of the second main game symbol based on the random number for determining the game content (the second main game random number), and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number. It has an auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H, which determines the stop symbol of.

Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN41ta-A for determining the first main game symbol is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game for the normal game state). Lottery table, probability variation game → 1st main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → 1st main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the winning / failing result and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery. The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the variation mode determining means MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number). The MN51-A, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), and It has an auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

Here, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the first main game normal). Game state lottery table, probability variation game → 1st main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → 1st main game time reduction game state lottery table). Further, the second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of winning or not and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game). State lottery table, probability fluctuation game → second main game probability fluctuation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining the auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode is determined. The decision lottery table MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables that differ depending on the game state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

Next, the display control means MP10 is placed on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20 for a predetermined time. Assistance for a predetermined time on the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that controls to stop and display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20. It has an auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H that controls to stop and display after changing the game symbol.

Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has a timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) for managing fluctuations in the first and second main game symbols that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

Next, in order to determine whether or not the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the conditions for opening / closing the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B and 2nd main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t for measuring the drive (opening) time of the electric accessory B11d -B and has.

Next, the special game control means MP30 has the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the content of the special game when the special game transition condition is satisfied. (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32, which determines the open large winning opening, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and sets it in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize. A special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) that opens the mouth C10 or the second big prize opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first big prize mouth). It has a special game time management means MP34 for performing (opening and closing time of C10 and the second prize opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes the first and second special winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d. , It has a winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determining means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b (table). Details are not shown).

Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition of the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition of the time shortened game state is satisfied. It has a time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 for determining. Here, the time saving game end condition determination means MP52 has a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the time saving number of times. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) during the time reduction game as compared with the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Further, the time reduction game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number of times (probability variation game with no time reduction limit). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The above-mentioned probabilistic game end condition determination means MP51 and time-saving game end condition determination means MP52 are, for example, a lottery for shifting from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time reduction game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the symbol changes. (In the case of a pachinko gaming machine having a so-called fall lottery function). The time reduction game state according to this example may be that the main game time reduction flag is on or that the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, that is, the time reduction game state. May indicate that the open time extension function is activated, and the non-time reduction gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not activated. The time-reduced gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time-reducing gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Further, the probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a high-probability lottery state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state may be referred to as a low-probability lottery state.

Next, the game state temporary storage means MB uses the first main game (the game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (the game from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). The first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game. Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, on / off of various flags related to the special game, etc.) It has an MB20b and a specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b for temporarily storing the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, on / off of various flags related to the specific game, etc.). ..

Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C is stopped related to the first or second main game symbol (the first or second main game symbol in which the change start condition is satisfied) that is currently changing. It has the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing the symbol and the variation mode information.

Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configurations of some peripheral devices have already been described, the remaining configurations will be briefly described. First, the game peripherals include a first main game peripheral device A which is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B which is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. The first and second main game shared peripheral devices C, which are the shared peripheral devices on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM, and the sub-sub control unit. It has SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effect controlled by the sub-main control unit SM is a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) in a form that is time-synchronized with the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. This is related to the display of only information that does not affect the result of the game, including fluctuations in the design). Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of stopping display and variable display of the second main game symbol. And have.

Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral devices C are in a closed state during a normal game, and are opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And has a second big winning opening C20.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H has an auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and a stop display and a variable display of the auxiliary game symbol. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of the above.

Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM is the display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, and the effect content determination process and display control process related to the effect display. It has an effect display control means SM20 that controls the above, and an information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereinafter, each of the above means will be described in detail.

First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. ..

Next, the effect display control means SM20 includes the decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the variation mode of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the stop symbol determination process, and the display control process, and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). The design hold information display control means SM22 that controls the number of hold pieces of 1 decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the hold display process, the background effect display control means SM23 that controls the background image determination process and the display control process, and the advance notice effect. It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the content determination process and the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the reach effect content determination process and the display control process.

Here, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, and the decorative symbol {in the present embodiment, it is referred to as two types of decorative symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independent of each other, and the game is played by combining three numerical symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. Various information (variation mode) related to the symbol variation of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) and the design display content determining means SM21n for determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the result can be notified}. Information display related information for temporarily storing information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc. The temporary storage means SM21b and the first decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) for timing the fluctuation time. It has a drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Here, the design display content determining means SM21n is a lottery (reference) table for determining the content of the design variation, which is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative design (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). SM21ta (details of the table are not shown) and decorations referred to when determining (or setting) the effect contents, display update timing, and display update contents of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It also has a design effect table SM21ta-2. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independently displayed and controlled by the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM side based on the information from the main control board M side. By making good use of these two types of decorative patterns, it is configured to enhance the interest in the production and make it easier to grasp the progress of the game. This point will be described later. do.

Next, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 has a drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the reservation related to the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). ..

Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect and the information related to the background effect display based on the information from the main control board M side. It has a background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b for the purpose.

Next, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n that determines the display content and display timing of the advance notice effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the advance notice effect display. It has a notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b for temporarily storing the information.

Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is the reach effect display content determining means SM25n that determines the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and the information related to the reach effect display. It has a reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b for temporarily storing the information.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control unit SM side, and an image display that displays an image in the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. It has a control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes an image display-related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing a command received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information related to various image displays.

Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 includes a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variablely displaying decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol), and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a first hold display unit SG12) for displaying main game hold information. 2 Hold display unit SG13) and.

The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit). ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS controls the sub-game. Means (sub-main control unit) It means that it is controlled by SM. It should be noted that the main control board M may be configured to control another peripheral device via another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of terminals (shown in rounded rectangles) indicating processing steps (shown in rectangles), judgments (shown in diamonds), flow lines (arrows), start / end / return, etc. .. Further, when the details of the processing steps are illustrated by another flowchart, the one that refers to the other flowchart is illustrated as a subroutine (shown by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). .. Here, at the development stage of a gaming machine, a gaming machine having different specifications is also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine (which is executed by a gaming machine having different specifications) is executed in the processing on the main side. Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed is prevented from being executed due to noise or fraudulent activity.

First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the main control board M. After the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the process shown in FIG. That is, after the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the initial settings are performed (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. It is determined whether or not the button) has been operated, that is, whether or not the operation of intentionally clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed by the administrator of the amusement park or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at the relevant timing). Alternatively, at that timing, a command may be set and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, it is saved in the checksum and the RAM area recorded at the time of power failure. Compare with the amount of information available). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is accurately backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in various ways at the time of power failure. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command is set at the relevant timing and the control command described later is set. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is T), {as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, the figure (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. .. After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment processes) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

The initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured so as not to be a value at which a special game is executed (noise or fraudulent activity immediately after the start of program processing). To prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process of determining the execution of the special game is executed).

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process of FIG. 3B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, when the fixed interrupt cycle T is reached (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes the electric accessory drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes the main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes the main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes the special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes the special game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (particularly, the prize ball payout determining means MH) performs the prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize opening in which the game ball wins. The payout control board KH is made to execute, and the process for managing the result, etc.) is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an output process of an external signal (information output to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC, or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each of the above processes to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing that was done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). Since there are cases, the command is configured to be transmitted in the order in which the command is determined to be transmitted on the main control board M side (the order in which the command is set).

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured so that the power failure signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process shown in FIG. Will be done. That is, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (in this example, when the NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the main control board M sets the power cut information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power cutoff waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entry determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (inflow, in the case of a gate, it has passed). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the hold balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires the auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, the auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H together with the information on the number of the holding balls. Is added by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200). If No is set in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory opening flag is off. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. .. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to set the game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag) on the auxiliary game side. At the same time as acquiring, the lottery table MN41ta-H for determining the auxiliary game symbol is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the game state of the acquired auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game time reduction flag). When is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when is off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sets the auxiliary game symbol to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C based on the game state of the auxiliary game side (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). A predetermined time related to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached with reference to the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol by referring to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H, and the acquired auxiliary game symbol. The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g. Then, in step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is a “hit”. In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag), and the second main game. Start port Electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B has a predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, 0.5 when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off). Seconds) is set. Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory opening flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. .. Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B to set the opening time of the electric accessory. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric accessory B11d and temporarily assists the game state. The electric accessory opening opening flag in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238, if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224, and if No in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 or step 1238, the next process is performed. (Processing in step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process immediately proceeds to the next step, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to move to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms has elapsed (for example, this process is performed by performing branch processing using the stop display fixed flag and timer. Achievable).

Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start port entry determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start opening entry information from the first main game start opening entry detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. Is received or not. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, and the main game (particularly the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning / failing lottery random number for determining the winning / failing, a symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and a fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variable mode lottery random numbers for the purpose are acquired. By the way, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, and are acquired in series at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. .. Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the first main game hold random number has been acquired (first main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, even if No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

Next, in step 1312, the second main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B receives the second main game start port entry ball from the second main game start port entry ball detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine if information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning / fail lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the case of the first main game content determination means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning / failing lottery random number for the first main game and the winning / failing lottery random number for the second main game). Acquisition range) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. .. Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 is a command transmission buffer for transmitting information to the effect that the second main game hold random number has been acquired (second main game hold generation command) to the sub-main control unit SM. It is set to MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Even if No in step 1312 or 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

In the present embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1310 and 1320, but the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. It may be transmitted with the number of pending items, and it is also possible to substitute this information as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digestion control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and confirms whether or not the hold of the second main game symbol exists. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the holding ball of the second main game symbol exists, regardless of the existence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol). It is configured to prioritize the hold digestion of the second main game symbol (even if it comes first), but it is not limited to this (hold digestion based on the winning order and both main game symbols are performed in parallel at the same time). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery to draw a lottery).

Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserved digestion control means MJ31 determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is a condition that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game symbol is not changing, and the main game symbol is held. Although not shown in this example, when a variable fixed time (time for stopping and displaying the confirmed display symbol after the final display of the main game symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation is set during the fixed variable time. May be configured so as not to satisfy.

In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the hold digestion control means MJ31 becomes the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol change, which is temporarily stored, is read out, and the first main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game). It is deleted from the symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (hold digestion processing). Next, in step 1410-1 1 The main game symbol winning / failing lottery is executed based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number).

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / losing lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability-variable gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability-variable gaming state. The winning probability is just an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the gaming state cannot be changed is not illustrated, but a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won). Further, in such a configuration, for example, (1) the winning probability of a small hit differs between the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game side is higher than the second main game side. Is easy to win (the second main game side does not have to provide a small hit), (2) When a small hit is won, the game state after the small hit ends is the same as the game state before the small hit starts. (If the jackpot is won, the gaming state after the jackpot ends may be different from the gaming state before the jackpot starts), (3) The jackpot is on the first main game side and the second main game side. The winning probabilities are the same, and the winning probabilities increase due to the probability-variable gaming state, whereas the winning probabilities differ between the first main game side and the second main game side for small hits. The winning probability is not changed by obtaining and entering the probability fluctuation game state. (4) As a stop symbol of the symbol variation of the symbol won in the small hit, a "special symbol" (for example, a special symbol) dedicated to the small hit is won. ★ such as "2 ★ 2" and "3 ★ 9" correspond to "special symbol") can be stopped, (5) Three of the same symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit Specific rolls that are not uniform and are a combination of numbers with a certain regularity (for example, the order such as "234", the reverse order such as "432", and the odd order such as "357". Etc.) can be stopped, (6) The big hit (2R or more, the number of rounds is different) that is the same (or similar) opening mode {visibility) as the small hit from the player's point of view. Seems to be the same opening mode when viewed from the player (the small hit is only one round, the big winning opening is opened multiple times in the one round, and the big hit is opened the same number of times as the multiple times. (Execute in a round)} is provided (in such a configuration, it is preferable to stop and display the combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish between a small hit and a big hit), ( 8) In the second decorative symbol, the "special symbol" dedicated to small hits does not stop (or may not stop), and (9) a combination of decorative symbols that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit. Even in the configuration in which is stopped and displayed, the ratio of whether the player is a small hit or a big hit differs depending on the type of combination of decorative symbols that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, by aligning three, the probability after the big hit is completed). When a decorative symbol whose transition to the variable gaming state is substantially definite is included in the stop symbol, the probability of being a big hit is higher than when it is not included).

Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) uses the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol). With reference to the symbol lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game symbol is related based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number). The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A / 5A / 7A" and "4B / 5B / 7B"). It is configured so that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. It should be noted that the random value and the type of the stop symbol are also examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols are provided. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol is different from that before the specific symbol is stopped (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

Next, in step 1410-3, the first main game variation mode determining means MN51-A (second main game variation mode determining means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each game state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode), the result of the main game symbol winning / failing lottery and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, variation). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the mode lottery random number), these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

Here, FIGS. 12 and 13 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time reduction flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation. It is configured so that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined. That is, when the winning / failing lottery result of the main game symbol is a hit, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and when the main game time reduction flag is on (time reduction game state), it is relative. It is easy to determine the variation mode in which the fluctuation time is short, and when the number of holds is 2-3, the fluctuation mode is relatively short compared to the case where the number of holds is 0 to 1. Is configured to be easy to determine (only when lost). It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {symbol variation on the second main game side. When is configured to be advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game side to hold the game by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main game side (advantageous to the player). Since the purpose is to build a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be separated}. In addition, an example of the effect executed at the time of selecting each variation mode is shown in "The effect mode executed on the sub side". In addition, as an effect mode to be executed on the sub side, a pseudo continuous variation (an effect in which it seems that a plurality of symbol fluctuations have occurred during one variation display of the main game symbol) is executed. A "pseudo-continuous failure effect" may be provided, which is an effect of notifying the player that the pseudo-continuous variation is not executed after inciting whether or not the player is injured. In the game state of, the random number distribution (execution frequency) of "pseudo-ream failure production-> stop of loss" is larger when the number of holds is 0 to 1 than when the number of holds is 2 to 3. (It may be configured in either the non-time-saving game state or the time-saving game state), and when the "pseudo-continuous success effect" is executed, the pseudo-continuous described later will be performed. It may be configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is executed after inciting the player whether or not the variation is executed. Further, the "pseudo-ream failure effect" and the "pseudo-ream success effect" are effects using a "special symbol" or a specific roll, which will be described later. After inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row, the decorative symbol one frame after the "special symbol" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the middle row, and the "pseudo-ream success effect" is displayed. When executed, the effect mode is such that the "special symbol" stops (temporarily stops) in the middle row after inciting the player whether or not the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row. There is. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortened game state which is an irregular symbol change, the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state is related. The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all have a variation time of 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, in step 1414, the game content determining means MN temporarily stores the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol) stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Information on the determined main game symbol such as variation mode information and commands related to the current game state) are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999). It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the variation display of the main game symbol is started according to the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. The process proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and change. Determines if the medium flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and if No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub-main control unit SM side to the effect that the symbol variation is completed. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (2nd main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). Stops the variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g), and displays the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C as a fixed stop symbol. Control. Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. ..

Next, in step 1430, the game content determining means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes the specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is larger than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472, the specific game control means MP50 decrements the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c by 1. Next, in step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476 and step 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and then turns off the next. (Processing in step 1500). In addition, even if No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 has the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction) in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) is turned off. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag and the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game executing means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) in the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is started to the sub-main control unit side (command transmission buffer MT10). In the control command transmission process in step 1999, it is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. If No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game has not been obtained, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game executing means MP33 sets the opening pattern in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to win the first large prize. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning mouth C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, if No in step 1612, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processes of steps 1614 to 1620.

Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for this purpose (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and in the round, a predetermined number (for example, 10) is inserted into the first winning opening C10 (or the second winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball (ball). If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, if No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (particularly the opening time timer), and the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the large winning opening is set. Determine if it has passed. In the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. If No in step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 of the first large winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric accessory C21d of the second large winning opening C20). The drive is stopped and the first prize opening C10 (or the second prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (particularly the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game executing means MP33 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the final round is completed (for example, the round number counter in the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is ended to the sub-main control unit SM side. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process in step 1997). Even if No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1997).

Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which relates to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is changed to the probabilistic jackpot symbol (in the stochastic game state after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, if No in step 1652, that is, if the stop symbol is a non-probability variable jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that does not shift to the probability-variable gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed, 4A / 4B in this example), step 1656. Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) in the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1658.

Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag and the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and next processing (step). (Processing in 1997).

Next, the control process executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 3A is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after a reset such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes the initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information). When received → Initialize the RAM on the sub side, when various information commands are received → Reset the effect-related information at the time of power failure to the RAM on the sub side). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM restores the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). It should be noted that the effect being executed is not restored, and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. After that, the process shifts to the loop processing in which the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, first, in step 2100, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs the hold information management process described later, as shown in the process of FIG. To execute. Next, in step 2200, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the first decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the special game-related display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and this End the iterative processing routine.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form in which the sub-main side routines (S2100 to S2999) are looped after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 3C is an interrupt process of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal), which is the processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub-main control unit SM uses the command input port from the main control board M side (when the STB signal line is turned on). Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 2006, the sub-main control unit SM sends a command from the main control board M side to the RAM (for example, the main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub-main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored and returns to the processing that was being executed immediately before this interrupt processing.

Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and commands (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to new hold generation from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to the game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game). Add "1" to the maximum of 4 for the 2nd main game). Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 bases the hold information (particularly, the random number value and the hold look-ahead group information related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, if No in step 2102, in step 2111, did the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receive the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2111, in step 2112, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing reservation counter in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 deletes the holding information related to the symbol change (particularly, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) from the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2118. In addition, even if No in step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is mounted on the effect display device SG (particularly, the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) by making full use of the effect display means SS. Figure Hold information Holds the same number of hold images as the number of hold counter values in the temporary storage means SM22b is lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2200).

Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The first decorative symbol (as described above, as described above, is displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design. It is a so-called decorative symbol that is controlled, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later.) Stop symbol {For example, if the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7.7. Numbers such as "7" (hits), in the case of a lost symbol, numbers such as "1, 3, 5"} and variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short. If it is fluctuating, it is non-reach, if it is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined. Related information Temporarily store in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and is an effective line (a line capable of notifying the result of success or failure by arranging three numerical symbols). ) Is one line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). Also, in the left column, middle column, and right column (or only in the middle column), in addition to the number symbols, "special symbols" (when displayed on the valid line, it does not mean a big hit, but after that, it is a big hit. It is a symbol that foretells that the occurrence of Has been done. The temporary stop is to temporarily stop and display the decorative symbols in all rows during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol to the stop display, and the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed. , The state in which the variable display can be started again during the relevant period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). Although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not included in the stop mode in which the temporary stop (provisional stop) is possible, the fixed stop is not performed, and the jackpot is notified. It is configured so that the "special symbol" at the time of executing the look-ahead effect can be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), can be fixedly stopped, and is not included in the stop mode for notifying the jackpot. ..

Next, in step 2208, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) temporarily stores the symbol information (and the symbol information (and the symbol information temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The display control is performed based on the information from the main control board M side as described above with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the change in the design. It is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later.) Stop symbol {For example, when the stop symbol related to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, "7, 7, 7 , Etc., if the number is doublet (hit), if the symbol is lost, the number is different, such as “1 ・ 3 ・ 5”} and the variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol fluctuates for a short time. In the case of non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the doublet display-related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the advance notice production-related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach production-related). Information is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and one effective line (a line in which it is effective to arrange the same numerical symbols) is one line. If the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be a loss). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped in the left column, middle column, and right column (the "special symbol" does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and it is configured so that it does not temporarily stop during the symbol change. .. In this way, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine the display content for notifying the success or failure of the main game symbol, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol has the property that both sides can independently notify the winning / failing result of the main game symbol as its basic property.

Next, in step 2216, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the result of the success / failure of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design effect table 1 to the decorative design effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the design variation. The display update timing and display update contents are set, and the information related to the drawing display is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and performs the next process (process of step 2300). Transition. Even if No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300).

In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the one on the first main game side (first main game symbol) or the one on the second main game side (). Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol. Alternatively, the display contents of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the second main game symbol, that is, the variable display of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Regardless of which of the variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be made feasible in conjunction with it. However, this is not the case in the time-reduced game state (a state accompanied by the so-called electric support state). Regardless of which of the display is performed, it can be exemplified that only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is in a state in which the variable display can be executed in conjunction with the display.

Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative pattern effect table 1, decorative pattern effect table 2) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 1, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 2, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). In the drawings, the first decorative symbol may be simply referred to as the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may be referred to as the second decorative symbol (the same shall apply hereinafter). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the result of success / failure of the main game symbol (shown in the leftmost column, in this example, “miss” or “big hit”) and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol). And the variation mode of the second decorative symbol) (shown in the second column on the left, and in this example, only in the case of "pseudo-ream failure (total production time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total production time 60 seconds)". Based on the example) and the acquired random number value (the random number value acquired on the sub-main board SM side, and a part of the random number value is shown in the left third column), the decorative design effect content (left fourth column). In this example, "main production A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", "main production B-1 (big hit) pseudo-ream, etc.") can be determined. When the decorative design effect content is determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, when the decorative design effect content = "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1", the "display update content" = "appearance" at the "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". It is determined that the figure fluctuation starts (all rows of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) ", and when" display update timing "=" 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation "," display update content "=" first design temporary stop display " (Left column), the second drawing is hidden. " Then, as will be described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" is referred to as the first decorative symbol according to the elapsed time related to the fluctuation time of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It will be executed sequentially for each of the second decorative symbols. That is, when "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" is determined, after all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, "display update timing" = "start of fluctuation". If the display of the first decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed) by the time it reaches "12 seconds later", the second decorative symbol is displayed. , The display is controlled so that all columns are displayed in a variable manner (the state of the variable display can be visually recognized), and when "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation" is reached, the first decorative symbol is displayed. With respect to, while the display is controlled so that only the left column is stopped, the display of the second decorative symbol is controlled so that all columns are hidden (even if the variable display is not displayed). .. As described above, the basic operation in the example of this example is that when the first decorative symbol is visible to the player (easy to see), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player. When the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player (difficult to see) while the first decorative symbol is invisible (difficult to see), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player (difficult to see). The second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a complementary manner in order to ensure that the player is informed that the symbol is changing (easily visible), that is, the player is informed that the symbol is changing. It should be noted that the effect pattern (series of display contents) defined in "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" is different from the effect pattern defined by the name of another decorative pattern effect content (that is, the display content is different). ) It should be added that it is a thing. Further, the range of the random number value is "0 to 1023" in all the variation modes, and this figure is an excerpt of a part of the random number range in the map variation mode (hence, it corresponds to a certain map variation mode). The random number range of the acquired random number value to be obtained and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the drawing variation mode different from the certain drawing variation mode are different from each other, but both are "0 to 1023". Range).

Here, in the present embodiment, the so-called pseudo-continuous variation is configured to be feasible. Specifically, the decorative symbol production contents "A-1 (loss) pseudo-ream 1" and "A-2" in this example. It is indicated by "(Loss) Pseudo-Ren 2" and "B-2 (Big Hit) Pseudo-Ren 2". For example, in the decorative pattern production content "A-2 (loss) pseudo-ream 2", "display update content" = "design variation start (first)" at "display update timing" = "at the start of fluctuation (0 seconds later)". After "1 decorative symbol and all rows of 2nd decorative symbol)" is executed, "display update timing" = "12 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "13 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "14 seconds after the start of fluctuation" "Display update contents" = "1st decorative symbol temporary stop display (left column)" (1st decorative symbol left column is stop display), "1st decorative symbol temporary stop display (right column)" (1st decorative symbol The right column is the stop display), and the "first design special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display at the above-mentioned "special symbol") is executed in sequence. After that, when "display update timing" = "15 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "start of fluctuation of the first design (all rows)" (only the first decorative symbol is displayed again in all rows). After execution, in "display update timing" = "26 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "27 seconds after the start of fluctuation", and "28 seconds after the start of fluctuation", "display update content" = "temporary stop display of the first drawing (1st drawing temporary stop display) "Left column)" (the left column of the first decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol temporary stop display (right column)" (the right column of the 1st decorative symbol is the stop display), "1st decorative symbol special symbol By sequentially executing the "temporary stop display" (the middle row of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by the above-mentioned "special symbol"), the player can perform the first variable display of the main game symbol during one variation display. Regarding one decorative symbol, it seems that the symbol variation has occurred multiple times (the appearance of this pseudo continuous variation and the appearance of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed are the image diagrams of FIG. 40. See).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is hidden (a state in which the stop display / variable display is not displayed) and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the above-mentioned "special symbol". The second decorative symbol is variably displayed when it is temporarily stopped, and in other cases, the second decorative symbol is hidden. That is, when the player can visually recognize the first decorative symbol or can determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is hidden (the first decorative symbol). (Because there is no hindrance to the progress of the game by displaying only), when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when it is not possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol {for example, When the "special symbol" is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all rows) are indistinguishable}, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player always has one of them. The decorative symbols (either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol) can be visually recognized, and the progress of the game can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" does not temporarily stop, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative symbol, and is interesting in the production. Since the main purpose is to increase the number of players, the second decorative symbol provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily grasped is a "special symbol" (that is, if it is displayed on the effective line, a big hit is given. This is because, although it does not mean, a symbol that may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game, such as a symbol that foretells that a big hit may occur after that, is not displayed. In the case of the above-mentioned "non-display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), a state in which the display is fluctuated at high speed (a fluctuating state in which an afterimage can be seen) may be included. In the case of the "display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the display is fluctuating at a low speed (in the case of the display mode fluctuating from top to bottom, slowly from the top). And (provisional) a fluctuating state toward the planned stop position) may be included.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so as not to be temporarily stopped during the fluctuation (and the "special symbol" is not stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second decorative symbol is also included. Similar to the first decorative symbol, it may be configured so that it can be temporarily stopped in the middle of the fluctuation (and a pseudo fluctuation can occur). That is, in such a configuration, all the rows of the first decorative symbol and all the rows of the second decorative symbol have substantially the same operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop), and the stop display is displayed. The types of symbols will be configured differently.

Further, the second decorative symbol does not need to be constantly displayed during the variable display of the main game symbol, and the display condition and display mode of the second decorative symbol may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) while a specific effect is being generated (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, the effect is such that a movie moving image is reproduced using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, or a so-called effect. The second decorative pattern is displayed at the time (2) a specific reach effect (the first) 1 Instead of making the decorative design invisible, it is the time of execution of the reach effect in which the jackpot expectation is remarkably increased. For example, the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG is forcibly suspended. The second decorative symbol is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is executed, and the second decorative symbol is hidden in other reach effects (especially when the reach effect with low jackpot expectation is executed). 3) The appearance position of the second decorative symbol on the effect display device SG is changed according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-mentioned movable accessory for effect advances to a state of obscuring the display area on the effect display device SG. In the case of such an effect, it is moved to the display area on the effect display device SG that is not obscured by the movable accessory for this effect), (4) The first decorative symbol can be moved / reduced / enlarged. On the other hand, for the second decorative symbol, the probability that the movement / reduction / enlargement display cannot be executed, or the movement / reduction / enlargement display is executed, the movement width, the reduction ratio, the enlargement ratio, etc. are the first decorative symbols. It may be lower than, etc.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2310. Even if No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 first decorates the first decoration based on the first design variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 2330.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2314, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a variation mode temporarily stored in the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2318, in step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the above-mentioned “special symbol” ( In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only at the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the angel zone flag (for notifying that the jackpot expectation is increased). The flag that triggers the display of the background image) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2324. On the other hand, even if No in step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the first decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Is done), and the process proceeds to step 2330. In the present embodiment, when the angel zone flag is turned on, the "angel zone background" is displayed as a background effect. However, as the timing when the angel zone flag is turned on, for example, , (1) While the symbol fluctuation with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, the symbol fluctuation that becomes reach), (2) when the symbol fluctuation related to the hold of the digestion schedule is stopped before the symbol fluctuation with a high jackpot expectation And so on. Further, although the details will be described later, the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to be turned on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above. It may be fixedly stopped at.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2318, in step 2326, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) is the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Even if No in step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (as described above, the player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol). It is determined whether or not it is obtained or it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol (when the second decorative symbol is hidden). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the second symbol display flag (the second decorative symbol is in a non-display state) in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. (Flag for switching between on = off and display state = on) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2330, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2336. ..

Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2336, in step 2338, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (confirmed display command) of the first decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2350). do. Even if No in step 2310 or 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2350).

In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM manages the timing related to the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like by using the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. However, the management method such as the timing related to the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol and the execution timing of the background effect is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200. All the contents such as timing, notice image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (background effect display switching timing), etc. are determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received contents. The effect may be executed (displayed) at any time at the same timing (the same applies to the second decorative symbol).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. .. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a second decorative symbol variable display execution command (command for variable display of the second decorative symbol) (transmission of display command in step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360. On the other hand, if No in step 2354, in step 2358, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for erasing the variable display of the second decorative symbol (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) (in step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process), and the process proceeds to step 2360.

Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, the main side information temporary storage means). With reference to SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and moves to the next process (process of step 2400). Transition. Even if No in step 2352 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative symbol display area. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game symbol and the hold for the second main game symbol may be displayed at the same time) are the effect display devices. It is configured so that it can be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the final display timing (the timing when the main game symbol is stopped and displayed). Since the first decorative symbol is the main decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol has higher visibility than the second decorative symbol (the displayed area is assumed to be larger). Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing (confirmed display timing) of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are the same timing.

Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special game in-game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406 and step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and also turns on the effect display device. The jackpot start display is displayed on the SG (displayed appropriately based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2412. Even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (game playability and jackpot). It may be executed as needed based on the type, etc.).

Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to display the effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit during execution and the big hit symbol during stop (). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 (for example, in the case of a special game related to the latent probability variation jackpot symbol, it is decided to shift to the probability fluctuation game state after the special game ends. An effect that the player cannot recognize is executed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 displays the jackpot end on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in-game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2500). .. Even if No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2500).

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "angel zone background" (background effect that can be displayed when the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped) as the background effect, and step 2506 Move to. Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the fluctuation (a part of the pseudo continuous fluctuation) that triggered the transition of the “angel zone” is completed. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect that was set before the "angel zone background" was set), and proceeds to step 2520. do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2502, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main side. .. In step 2512, in the case of Yes, in step 2514, a stage transition lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (1/20 in this example) is executed (the stage transition lottery is executed at the start of each fluctuation). .. Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 shifts to loop each stage in the order of a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, flat ground stage → space stage → volcano stage → flat ground stage). Based on (Iku), the background effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. In addition, even if No in step 2506, step 2512 or step 2516, the process proceeds to step 2520.

Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the set background effect on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side is set. (Transmitted), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is hidden (stopped). By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed (variable display) in a situation where the display / variable display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to see, the player always displays one of the decorative symbols. It can be a user-friendly gaming machine that can be visually recognized and can accurately determine whether or not a stopped symbol or a jackpot symbol is stopped.

(Example 1 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" is always stopped for the temporary stop symbol in the middle row, and the first decorative symbol is always displayed while the variation is displayed. 2 The decorative symbol is configured to be hidden, but the display control method of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 27 and 28 (decorative design effect table 3 and decorative design effect table 4) show the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative design effect table 3, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a loss, and , Decorative design effect table 4, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). First, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the first decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during the change. Further, for example, at the time of executing pseudo continuous fluctuation such as "A-6 (loss) pseudo-ream 2 (specific roll)", the specific roll is stopped in addition to the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle symbol. It is configured to be possible. Here, unlike the "special symbol", the specific roll is a roll in which all columns (left column, middle column, right column) are stopped by numbers, but the stop mode is according to a certain rule. (For example, the order is "345" or the like), and it is configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous variation is being executed when the specific roll is stopped. Further, in the change example 1 from the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, in the case of a loss, the specific outcome is more likely to be stopped than the "special symbol" at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific roll at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, that is, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than when the specific roll is stopped. There is a higher expectation that it will be a big hit when is stopped. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no problem even if it is configured so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the specific roll is stopped than when the "special symbol" is stopped. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, all the symbols are re-variated, that is, the three symbols are re-variated after the three symbols are temporarily stopped. In such a case, the three symbols are re-variated. , If the "special symbol" temporarily stops in the middle row and then the middle row re-variates, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is no longer a "special symbol" {for example, "6 ★ 7" "(★ = special symbol), it re-varies in the state of" 667 "(the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of the" ± 1 "frame of the right symbol or the left symbol)} It may be configured as follows.

Next, the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail with respect to the second decorative design. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be always displayed while the main game symbol is changing. In the case of reach, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is also confirmed and displayed at the same time at the final display timing of the first decorative symbol. (The same symbol will be stopped and displayed for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). The variable display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this. For example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. In that case, the second decorative symbol is hidden, that is, the specific roll is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped, and the middle column is temporarily stopped. If it is inside, the second decorative symbol is hidden, while if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing in the middle row, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner (or provisionally). It may be configured to be a stop display). Further, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped in accordance with the stop and temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. Further, the second decorative symbol may be configured to be constantly changed and displayed regardless of the changing state of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may also be fixedly stopped only when the first decorative symbol is fixedly stopped.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the present embodiment, the quasi-continuous fluctuation is configured so that the specific roll can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. The player can pay attention to which of the stop modes can be provided at the time of execution by providing a plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop and by making the expected degree of big hit different depending on the stop mode. Therefore, the fun of the game will increase.

In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol is displayed during the execution of a specific effect such as during the reach effect. May be configured not to be variablely displayed (hidden), or only a specific column (for example, the middle column) may be hidden.

In addition, in the change example 1 from this embodiment, the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured to be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, but the specific roll (or "special symbol") is configured. ) May be displayed in the left column and the right column. For example, (1) the left column and the right column are the same number, and the middle column is ± 1 of the same number. (For example, "4, 5, 4" or "special symbol" is arranged at the position of 5 in the middle row), (2) In the same stop mode as the lost eye that is not a specific result. However, there is a change in sound or color to notify that it is a specific result, (3) Temporary stop in all rows at the same time, (4) Numbers in the left and / or right columns are at the temporary stop timing in the middle row. Changed, (5) If the decorative symbols in the left and right columns are separated by "2" or more, the decorative symbols in the middle column are separated from the left and / or right columns by "2" or more. In case of temporary stop due to loss, etc. In addition, the appearance condition of a specific roll may be changed, for example, it is likely to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left column and the right column are the same (or appear only when they are the same). For example, it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) after reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the appearance of a "special symbol" (or a specific roll) when it is not reach. After that, there is a high possibility that the "special symbol" will temporarily stop again during the symbol change {for example, "7 ★ 7" has a higher expectation of big hit than "7 ★ 8" (★ = special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured so that there is a high possibility that it will be temporarily stopped again.

(Example 2 of change from this embodiment)
Here, the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is given in the present embodiment and the modification 1 from the present embodiment, but the configuration of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation other than the configuration is given. A new game property can be created by the configuration of the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 2 from the present embodiment, and only the changes with respect to the modification 1 from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIGS. 29 and 30 (decorative design effect table 5, decorative design effect table 6) show the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative design effect table 5, in particular, a part of the case where the result of success or failure is a loss, and , The decorative design effect table 6, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). First, the first decorative design will be described in detail as to the changes from the first modification from the present embodiment. In the second modification from the present embodiment, the "special symbols" that are displayed during the fluctuation and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation are "special symbol A" and "special symbol A". Two types, "special symbol B", are provided. Here, the "special symbol A" is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (even after that timing), while the "special symbol B" is pseudo continuous. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from the second temporary stop timing of the middle row in the fluctuation. Further, the specific roll is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (even after that timing). That is, in the temporary stop timing of the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, two types of stop modes, "special symbol A" and a specific output, can be temporarily stopped, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. In the temporary stop timing of, as the stop mode, "special symbol A", "special symbol B", and three types of specific rolls can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is configured. There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation than at the temporary stop timing. As described above, in the temporary stop timing of the middle row of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the types of stop modes may be increased as the temporary stop timing in the latter half increases, and the types of stop modes may increase as the temporary stop timing in the latter half increases. May be configured to be less. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes increases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, a stop mode with a high expectation that the change becomes a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed is used. It may be configured to be newly added, and by such a configuration, the player pays attention to each time the pseudo-variation is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the number of types of stop modes decreases as the temporary stop timing in the latter half is reached, a stop mode with a low expectation that the change becomes a big hit as a type of selection candidate each time a pseudo change is executed is used. It may be configured to be deleted, and by configuring it in such a configuration, it is possible to guarantee the degree of expectation that the fluctuation will be a big hit each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Since the second decorative design has the same configuration as the first modification from the present embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped as the temporary stop timing becomes the latter half. By configuring so that the number of stopping modes increases, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stopping mode at the time of the temporary stop, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Example 3 of change from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided, and the first decorative symbol is hidden (stop display / variable display is not displayed). The second decorative symbol is displayed (variable display) in a state) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, but the configuration using the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 3 from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2232 (variation 3) to step 2236 (variation 3), step 2900 (variation 3), step 2246 (variation 3) and step 2248 (variation 3), that is, step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (variation 3), the design display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the current gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2234 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the probabilistic display mode (during the probability variation game state). (Display mode of the decorative pattern to be displayed in) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2232 (variation 3), in step 2236 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n changes the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol into a non-probable variable display mode (variant 3). The display mode of the decorative symbol to be displayed during the non-probability variation game state) is determined, and the process proceeds to step 2900 (variation 3). As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be different depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state, and the first decoration is used. When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when the non-probability variable gaming state is changed to the stochastic variable gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also changed in accordance with the change. The display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to a configuration that differs only depending on whether or not the game is in the probability-variable gaming state. It may be configured to differ depending on which production (production stage) is.

Next, in step 2900 (variation 3), the marking display content determining means SM21n executes a drawing stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information regarding the variation mode of the main game symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (variation 3) in FIG. 31 in the modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the symbol variation is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, the map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the number of rounds executed in the special game related to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds ( In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three sets of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol as "white" symbols (for example, "777") and Determined to be one of the three "black" symbols (for example, "444") (the three "white" symbols are selected. The total distribution rate and the three "black" symbols are selected. Is 1: 1 with the total distribution ratio selected), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2904, in step 2908, the marking display content determining means SM21n has three "black" symbols for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol (for example, "444"). It is determined to be one of the above, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. As described above, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are in the case of a special game in which the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is obtained. It is configured so that it can only be stopped, that is, when the three sets of white symbols are stopped, it is almost certain that the special game of the maximum number of rounds (16R in this example) is executed. (It may be relatively more profitable for the player than a set of three "black" symbols).

On the other hand, if No in step 2902, in step 2910, the marking display content determining means SM1n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2912, the design display content determining means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol to a predetermined lost symbol (in this example, "345", and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern. Is determined), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2246 (variation 3)}. The type of the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol does not have to be only one pattern, but it is desirable that the number of types is less than the type of the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Further, the stop symbol at the time of loss of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined lost symbol (“345” in this example), whereas the stop symbol at the time of loss of the first decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of candidates. (For example, it is randomly selected from 300 types of stop symbol candidates), so that the frequency at which the predetermined lost symbol is stopped at the time of loss is higher in the second decorative symbol than in the first decorative symbol (for example). As the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined lost symbol may be configured so as not to stop). In addition, all the lost symbols that can be stopped in the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used) are the highest for the player in any gaming state when three identical symbols are aligned. It may be configured so that one or more profitable symbols (for example, "7" symbol) are always included (for example, "375" and "276" can be stopped).

Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram relating to the display mode of the decorative symbol in the third modification from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are different depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability variable gaming state or the stochastic variable gaming state. The display mode (in this example, the display color, which is a display attribute such as a color scheme, shape, size, etc.) is configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability variable game state, only the "7" symbol is displayed in "white" together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all the symbols other than "7" are displayed as "white". While it is configured to be displayed in "black" (in a non-probability variation display mode), in the case of a probability variation game state, "3" symbol and "7" are displayed together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The symbols are displayed in "white", and all the symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed in "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured so that the display mode may differ depending on the game state (the display mode is a probabilistic display mode). The condition in which the display mode is different is not limited to whether or not it is in the probability-variable gaming state, and it may be whether or not it is in the time-shortening gaming state, and it differs depending on which background effect (effect stage) is being executed. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, in the change example 3 from this embodiment, the symbol whose display attribute can change depending on whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation gaming state is the “3” symbol, but the “3” symbol is described above. It is included in the combination of the predetermined lost symbols (in this example, "345") in which the second decorative symbol is stopped at the time of loss (it becomes the stopped symbol in the left column), and in the non-probability variable gaming state. Is displayed in "black" for all the stop symbols of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss, while in the probability fluctuation game state, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the time of loss is "white" from the left column. , "Black", "Black" will be displayed.

Next, FIGS. 34 and 35 (decorative pattern effect table 7, decorative pattern effect table 8) are a part of the decorative pattern effect table SM21ta-2 (decorative pattern effect table 7, especially when the result of success or failure is a loss. And, it is an example of the decorative design effect table 8, in particular, a part of the case where the winning / failing result is a big hit). The change from this embodiment is that the item of the decorative symbol type is set as the display update type, and three items of "first decorative symbol", "second decorative symbol", and "transmissive liquid crystal display" are provided. In the third modification from the present embodiment, the transparent effect in which the J display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transparent is configured to be executable, and the first decoration is performed during the period when the transparent effect is executed. The symbol is hidden, but the second decorative symbol is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are step 2327-1 (variant 3) and step 2327-2 (variant 3), that is, when the notice image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326, step 2327-. In 1 (variation 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 is a transparent effect (effect) based on the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect) that the display area SG10 of the display device SG is transparent. In the case of Yes in step 2327-1 (variation 3), in step 2327-2 (variation 3), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets the image display command related to the transparent effect (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2328. When the transparent effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transmitted, and the state in which the accessory in the effect display device SG is driven can be visually recognized, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. Is erased (hidden), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification from the present embodiment, a hold number display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (to the right when viewed from the player). With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the number of reservations even during the execution of the transparent effect.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the special game-related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special game in-game flag is on, step 2410 (change). In change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command (for example, "777" continues to stop) to continuously display the second decorative symbol from the time when the jackpot symbol related to the special game is stopped (step). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2412. As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during the execution of the special game, and the player can use which decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). It is possible to determine whether or not the special game is being executed even during the special game.

Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram relating to the configuration of the effect display device in the third modification from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and the conceptual top view of the effect display device, a second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (as viewed from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light (light emission). The light is output in the direction of the display area SG10), so that the second decorative symbol and the hold number display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Further, although the effect can be displayed in the display area SG10 by outputting the light from the light source, the effect is not displayed in the area of the display area SG10 adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device, and the effect is not displayed. The display of the second decorative symbol and the hold number display area by the decorative symbol display device is configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the transparent effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and the accessory inside the effect display device SG is visible. Since the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is being executed even during the execution of the transparent effect, it is visible to the player. With this configuration, even in a situation where the transparent effect is being executed, the player can recognize the change state of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device. Become. The number of holds may be displayed differently depending on the game state (for example, the number of holds for the first main game is displayed in the non-time reduction game state, and the time reduction game state is displayed. (Displays the number of 2nd main game hold), the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold may always be displayed, or the total of the number of 1st main game hold and the number of 2nd main game hold. It may be configured to display the number of holds. The configuration for displaying the effect in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, and the display area SG10 may be configured to be switched between the transparent state and the non-transparent state. For example, the position of the light source may be changed. A light guide plate (a transmissive plate-shaped member that vertically scatters light emitted from a light emitting element incident from a side surface) may be used (for example, light is output from diagonally behind the display area). It may be a display area (so-called edge light type) for displaying through, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like. As an example of the configuration using the light guide plate, when viewed from the player side, the "transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)" and the "light guide plate {the light source plate is arranged close to the transmissive liquid crystal (about 5 mm), and the light source plate is concerned. A light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source. When arranging in the order of "light source C for emphasizing an object and showing it to the player" and executing a transmission effect (when you want to emphasize an object and show it to the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source). The output of A may be reduced compared to when the transmission effect is not executed), the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned on, and the transmission effect is not executed (I do not want to show the character to the player, and I do not want to show the character to the player. When the player wants to show the effect in the display area SG10), the outputs of the light source A and the light source B are turned on, and the output of the light source C is turned off (the output of the light source C is reduced as compared with the time when the transmission effect is executed). It may be configured to be). Further, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, when the second decorative symbol display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10). The second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area can be displayed in the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as the mechanism in which the effect is displayed by outputting the light from the light source toward the display area SG10. By substituting the light source for the second decorative symbol display device, the second decorative symbol display device constantly outputs light even if the transmission effect is executed and the light source does not output light. 2 The display of the decorative design and the holding number display area may be configured to be always visible (the light guide plate is used to prevent the transmissive liquid crystal from transmitting).

Next, FIG. 39 is a transparent effect execution image diagram in the third modification from the present embodiment. In this example, the pseudo continuous variation is executed twice in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) (variation of pseudo-ream 2), and one symbol variation is executed. The case is illustrated. First, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as the second middle row temporary stop symbol. After that, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) is started again, and the display area SG10 becomes a transparent state due to the execution of the transparent effect, and the back of the display area SG10 (game). The state in which the character in (from the perspective of the person) is being driven becomes visible to the player. After that, the transparent effect ends (the display area SG10 becomes non-transparent), the accessory in the back of the display area SG10 (as seen by the player) becomes invisible, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of loss, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the lost symbol {the second decorative symbol stops at the predetermined lost symbol (“345”), and the first decorative symbol It is a combination of stop symbols that can be different from the lost symbol ("787")}. In the case of a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the jackpot symbol {the jackpot symbol of the first decorative symbol and the jackpot symbol of the second decorative symbol have the same combination of stop symbols. Is}. After that, the special game is executed, and even during the execution of the special game, the second decorative symbol continues to be stopped and displayed with the same jackpot symbol as at the start of the special game. In addition, even during the execution of the special game, the transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be in the transparent state). By configuring the transparent effect to be executed immediately before the execution, the player can raise the expectation of shifting to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game by visually recognizing the transparent effect. Even if the transparent effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the display of the second decorative symbol and the reserved number display area is maintained (because it is visible), so that the progress of the game is not hindered. It is configured as. As an example of displaying decorative symbols during a special game, for example, during a special game, only one of the aligned symbols is displayed in order to notify the player which of the three decorative symbols is a big hit. (For example, if a big hit is made with "777", "7" is displayed), and when the transparent effect is executed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible, so that the player can see the aligned symbols. In order to make it recognizable, the display of the second decorative symbol and the hold number display area may be maintained even during the special game.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in a transparent state, and the accessory in the effect display device SG becomes visible. Since the effect is configured to be executable and the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the transparent effect, the player can perform the second decorative symbol. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the change status of the decorative symbol and the number of holdings, and it is possible to make the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the end of the special game related to the entry into the first main game start port A10 and the game state transition distribution after the end of the special game related to the entry into the second main game start port B10. In addition to making the rates different, the display attributes of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) can be made different depending on whether or not the game is in a probability-variable gaming state, suggesting or notifying the player that it is highly profitable. By making the number of types of symbols different, the game ball is inserted into the first main game start port A10 to advance the game, rather than the non-profit variable game state in which the game ball is entered into the second main game start port B10. In the probability-variable game state in which the player enters the ball to proceed with the game, the number of types of display attributes of the jackpot symbol in which the transition to the probability-variable game state is almost definite after the end of the special game has increased. It is possible to appropriately suggest or notify the player whether or not the game state of the player is highly profitable for the player.

Further, in the change example 3 from the present embodiment, the current game state and the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) correspond to any change of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. The decorative symbol of the display attribute is variablely displayed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the first main game symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the second main game symbol have a common display (and display attribute). (The display attributes and display areas of the decorative symbols are not differentiated between the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol).

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of decorative symbols, a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol, are provided so that the result of the symbol variation can be accurately recognized, but the configuration is a look-ahead lottery. Can also be applied to configurations that enable. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), the purpose of which is to subsubscribe the variation mode random number delimiter information which is the information referred to when determining the look-ahead effect content. That is, in step 1308, after storing the first main game content determination random number, in step 1322 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sets the flag of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Refer to the area and determine whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game time reduction flag is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1324 (second), in step 1326 (second), the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold information (win / fail lottery random number and symbol determination random number) to determine the win / fail result and stop symbol related to the stored hold. Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM, which is a command transmission buffer MT10. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1330 (second), the hold control means MJ30 predetermines the change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the change mode) (variation). For the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, the process proceeds to step 1332 (second) in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 with reference to the main game table 3. Further, even if No in step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process proceeds to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation time). Next, in step 1332 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sub-submits a command related to the new hold occurrence (a command for holding the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information, etc.). It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, when the design information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the second embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub side. , It is desirable to have a configuration in which the stop symbol of the main game symbol that becomes the big hit can be notified to the player (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol becomes a big hit).

As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode when the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when hold occurs). It is configured to determine the group.

It should be noted that, at the timing when the hold occurs, the main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side, but further, the sub side may be configured. The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, and information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol that becomes a big hit (number of special game rounds related to the main game symbol scheduled to be stopped, etc.) ), Number of holds immediately after winning a prize (The number of holds on the winning side of the 1st main game side or the 2nd main game side may be the number of holds on both the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side) It may be configured to be able to transmit information related to It is one of the random number delimited information that is grouped by associating the result of the winning / losing lottery with the result of the lottery. Even if it is in a non-probability variable game state, it is a hit, if it is a probabilistic variable game state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability variable game state, it is lost, and so on.}

Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the hold control means MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and refers to the special game. Determine if the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (second), in step 1338 (second), the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold information (win / miss lottery random number and symbol determination random number) to determine the win / fail result and stop symbol related to the stored hold. Is determined in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to the newly generated hold result and stop symbol information to the sub-main control unit SM, which is a command transmission buffer MT10. (Transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999).

Next, in step 1342 (second), the hold control means MJ30 predetermines the change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group related to the stored hold based on the hold information (random number for determining the change mode) (variation). For the mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group, the process proceeds to step 1344 (second) of FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 with reference to the main game table 3. Next, in step 1344 (second), the hold control means MJ30 subsubscribes a command related to a new hold occurrence (a command for holding a second main game content determination random number, a command related to variable mode random number delimiter information, etc.). Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and shift to the next process (process in step 1400). ..

On the other hand, if No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game time reduction flag is off. Judge whether or not. If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

In steps 1308 and 1318, the first main game content determination random number is stored and the second main game content determination random number is stored, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. When storing, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only the information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte that stores the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure it so that other information such as values is not stored (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like. To prevent it from getting stuck). In addition, regarding the winning / failing lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the already recorded game state related to the hold) between the acquisition of the winning / failing lottery random number and the execution of the winning / failing lottery related to the winning / failing lottery random number. Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of executing the winning / failing lottery related to the lottery random number is unpredictable). Is configured to store the lottery random number until the execution of. In the second embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only when the hold occurs related to the first main game in the non-time reduction game state, while the time reduction game state. In, it is configured so that it can be transmitted only when the hold related to the second main game occurs, but regardless of which game state the hold is related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game. Instead, the command may be configured to be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may be configured to execute the determination of whether or not to use the received command. Further, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D000H: Missing, D001H: Losing if low accuracy, Hit if high accuracy, D002H: Hit with both low accuracy and high accuracy". Yes, a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is "D100H: 16R probability variation hit, D101H: 16R non-probability variation hit, D102H: 2R probability variation hit", and is sent to the sub-main control unit SM. Specific examples of the command related to the random number delimiter information to be transmitted are "D200H: Delimiter 1, D201H: Delimiter 2, D202H: Delimiter 3".

Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) show the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. This is an example. The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided. That is, in the second embodiment, the variation mode is provided for a certain random number value (or random number value range). It is configured so that the random number delimiter information is determined, and the number of variation mode groups (the number of random numbers separated), the variation time, and the random number value range of the variation mode group differ depending on the game state and the result of the winning / failing lottery (for example). , The range of random number values is different even in the same group 1), and by transmitting the variation mode random number delimiter information to the sub side, the variation mode group according to these gaming states is on the sub side. It is configured so that it can be derived by. That is, when the game state changes between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the variation mode group executed at the time of digestion of the hold may differ. (For example, the variable mode group was planned to be group 1 because it was in a non-time shortened gaming state when the hold occurred, but the actual variable mode group became group 2 because it was in a time shortened game state when the hold was exhausted. However, with respect to the variation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the game states, when the variation mode random number delimiter information is received on the sub side (the subsequent game state). It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold look-ahead effect (without considering the transition). Further, the variation mode random number delimiter information in FIGS. 32 and 33 is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, whether the winning / failing lottery result is a hit or a loss, and the game. It is configured to form different variation mode random number delimited information depending on whether the state is a time-reduced gaming state or a non-time-reduced gaming state, but the variation is not limited to this, and is it a variation on the first main game side? One variation mode random number delimiter including whether it is a fluctuation on the second main game side, whether the winning / failing lottery result is a win or a loss, and whether the game state is a time-shortened game state or a non-time-shortened game state. It may be configured to form information. Further, in order to cause the second main game hold during the change of the first main game symbol in the time shortened game state which is an irregular symbol change, the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state is related. The contents of the variation mode determination table may be configured so that a short variation mode is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (for example, all have a variation time of 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is in step 2003 (second), that is, after executing the initial processing in step 2002, in step 2003 (second), the sub-main control unit SM is on the main side (main). Based on the information received from the control board M side), the number of holds (for example, the drawing hold counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the effect being executed and the look-ahead effect is not restored (because the information related to the contents of the hold is not retransmitted from the main side), and the "preparing" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. .. With this configuration, if a power failure occurs when the background effect is "Angel Zone Background", which will be described later, the information stored on the sub side will be lost. After the return of, there is no information that the trigger is on hold, and the background effect will be changed from the "angel zone background" to another background effect (background effect such as a flat ground stage, which will be described later). As a result, there is a discrepancy between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to the power failure (for example, due to noise at the time of power failure or recovery from the power failure). However, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a low expectation level is fluctuating on the main side and a high expectation level zone effect is executed on the sub side. The processing after the power failure is restored is not limited to this, and even after the power failure is restored, the information that the trigger is held immediately before the occurrence of the power failure is restored, and as a background effect, " It may be configured to maintain the "angel zone background". In such a configuration, for example, a save area capable of maintaining information even during a power failure is provided on the sub side, and when a power failure occurs, the information related to the effect is backed up in the save area and the power is restored. It may be configured to restore the backed up information from time to time. In addition, even if it is configured to receive the information related to the contents of the hold again from the main side when the power is restored, the change starts, the change stops, or the hold occurs (even for the hold other than the newly generated hold). Good {Although not shown in this example, it is configured so that only the information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (the information related to the contents of the hold is not transmitted) when the power is restored. .. Therefore, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of the power failure does not exist after the power failure is restored, the look-ahead effect cannot be executed for the hold (note that the information is held from the main side when the power is restored. It may be configured to receive the information related to the above, and to be able to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold). If a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative pattern (first decorative pattern and second decorative pattern), the change occurs from the main side if the function for maintaining the information at the time of the power failure is not provided. A blackout screen (for example, a screen displaying "preparing" or the like) will be displayed until the end command of is received}. In the second embodiment, it may be described that switching the background effect so as to display the "angel zone background" as the background effect shifts to the "angel zone".

Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment are step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104. Then, after adding 1 to the drawing hold counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 receives a new hold result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. The command related to the above is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 receives hold information (particularly, variable mode group, variable mode random number delimited information) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. If the information related to the result of winning / failing, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information is not transmitted from the main side, step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second). The information is not temporarily stored in the reserved information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes the first main game winning pre-reading determination process described later, and steps 2126 (second). Move to. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes the second main game winning pre-reading determination process described later, and steps 2126 (second). Move to 2).

Next, in step 2126 (second), does the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refer to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and have information that the new hold is a trigger hold? Whether or not it is determined (information indicating that the trigger is on hold is added in step 2576 or step 2622). In the case of Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 executes the look-ahead hold content determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118.

On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 receives the holding information related to the symbol change (particularly, the result of winning or not, the stopped symbol information, The variable mode group and the variable mode random number delimited information) are deleted from the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining reservation information is shifted, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and the process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former prohibition process of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2552, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the second main game hold (first main game hold) in the hold. It is determined whether or not there is a hold) that is digested with priority over the game side. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the hold look-ahead effect execution enablement / non-executability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-reduced gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Determine if there is none. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning (the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning the first main game, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning the second main game). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2560, the process proceeds to step 2562.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2562, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k executes a winning look-ahead lottery for winning the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). The process proceeds to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2562, in step 2568, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group 3. Is determined. As described above, in the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. When determining whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the look-ahead lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k executes a winning look-ahead lottery for winning the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example). The process proceeds to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process proceeds to step 2574.

Next, in step 2574, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for a new hold that has won the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

On the other hand, if No in step 2552 (when the second main game hold exists in the hold), in step 2578, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "trigger hold" from the stored information related to the hold (if there is no hold with the information that the trigger is held in the hold, this process is not executed and the next step is performed. The process proceeds to), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. In addition, even when No in step 2554, step 2558, step 2560, or step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. In the process of step 2578, when a hold on the second main game side exists (occurs), in the second main game side preferential digestion game machine as in the second embodiment, the newly generated second is performed. Since the hold on the main game side is consumed first, the order of fluctuations is not as planned, and the pre-reading effect over multiple fluctuations is not normally executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery, a condition as to whether or not there is a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a reservation of a specific variation mode random number delimited information) in the hold before the new hold is a prohibition condition. May be good.

Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the second main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. 44. This process will be described separately for the process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and the process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former prohibition process of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2602, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the current game state is the time-shortened game state. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Determine if there is none. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold before the new hold. Is determined. If Yes in step 2606, the process proceeds to step 2608.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2608, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. It is determined whether or not it is. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning look-ahead lottery for the jackpot hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2608, in step 2612, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group C. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (with a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning look-ahead lottery for the loss hold) for the new hold. Yes, in this example, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620.

Next, in step 2620, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k is "trigger hold" for a new hold that has won the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}. In addition, even when No in step 2602, step 2604, step 2606 or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2126 (second)}.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in both the case where the new hold becomes a big hit and the case where the new hold becomes a loss, the look-ahead for the hold of the first main game side is more than the look-ahead lottery for the hold of the second main game side. The lottery is easier to win (pre-reading lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a big hit hold = 1/3> pre-reading lottery when the second main game hold is a big hit hold Winning rate = 1/5, pre-reading lottery when the first main game hold is a lost hold Winning rate = 1/10> Pre-reading lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is a big hit hold = 1 / 15). With this configuration, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect. It is easy to do.

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the look-ahead pending content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. 44. First, in step 2652, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger hold with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process (step 2118). Process). On the other hand, if No in step 2652, in step 2656, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

Here, the two tables in the lower part of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when the display mode of the trigger hold that can change when the hold change effect is executed is determined by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is rainbow color. There are four types of display modes, red, green, and blue, and there are three types of display modes that can be selected when deciding by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss). A lottery will be drawn using a random number dedicated to determining the mode. When referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), red is most likely to be selected, while when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of loss), blue is most likely to be selected. The jackpot expectation for each display mode of the hold when is generated (the expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot due to the symbol fluctuation related to the hold) is selected only when the rainbow color is a jackpot, and the color other than the rainbow color is the expectation. The order is red, green, and blue in descending order. It should be noted that the display mode that can be changed is only an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is increased or decreased or the color that can be changed is changed. Further, in this example, the expected degree of a big hit can be suggested by the display color of the hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the case of a big hit (or together with the expected degree of a big hit). It may be configured to suggest the game state after the special game is executed. In such a configuration, in particular, during the probability-variable game state, the display color of the hold suggests the degree of expectation of shifting to the probability-variable game state after the special game is executed when a big hit is made in the hold. (For example, if the hold display color is red, the probability variation expectation is high, if it is blue, the probability variation expectation is small, etc.), it is possible to determine whether the probability variation game state, which is advantageous for the player, continues or ends. It is possible to perform a fanning and effective production.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation degree can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured so that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the timing when the look-ahead lottery is won to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). With this configuration, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the look-ahead effect, and the hold display mode that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time. The hold display mode that changes with the hold change effect is changed to green or red, that is, each time the hold change effect is executed, the hold display mode is changed (ranked up) to a hold display mode with a high expectation of a big hit. It is desirable to configure it so that it does not impair the expectations of the player. Further, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not accompany the change in the hold display may be provided. An effect mode in which the effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is (so-called Gase pattern) and an effect mode in which the hold display change is subsequently executed may be provided.

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is about step 2206 (second) and step 2250 (second), the purpose of which is to stop the first decorative symbol (including at the time of temporary stop), particularly the above-mentioned ". The purpose is to change the factor for determining "special symbol" (that is, a symbol that does not mean a jackpot but foretells that a jackpot may occur after that). That is, in step 2204, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2206 (second), the design display content determination means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n). Refers to the symbol information (variation mode related to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and changes the first decorative symbol. {For example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short-term variation, non-reach, when it is long-term variation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b (And the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b) is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to step 2208.

Further, in step 2216, the decorative design effect content is determined, and the display update timing and the display update content are set. The figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. That is, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop) is determined by the advance notice effect / design stop symbol determination process, which will be described later.

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. 48. First, in step 2252, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the change is a change related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the “special advance notice effect candidate”. Here, the "special notice effect candidate" is a notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the notice effect when the background effect is the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and next processing (process of step 2218). ). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, and the reason is the "angel zone" described later. When it is in the "background" (that is, the state where the existence of a hold with a high expectation of a big hit has already been notified), the above-mentioned "special symbol" (that is, it does not mean a big hit, but a big hit can occur after that). This is because if the symbol that announces the above is stopped and displayed, the player may have a mysterious effect due to the double notification of similar information.

On the other hand, if No in step 2252, in step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and determines whether or not the angel zone rushing flag is off. If Yes in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2260.

Next, in step 2264, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "normal advance notice effect candidate". Here, the "normal advance notice effect candidate" is a advance notice effect candidate to be referred to when determining the advance notice effect when the background effect is other than the "angel zone background" described later. Next, in step 2266, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns on the angel zone entering flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol in the middle row of the first decorative symbol as the "special symbol", and based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the first decorative symbol A temporary stop symbol for the left column and the right column is determined (a symbol different from the left column and the right column is temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2218).

On the other hand, if No in step 2256, in step 2270, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the variation mode group of the variation is group 3. The changes related to the hold of Group 3 that did not win the look-ahead lottery (look-ahead lottery at the time of winning) (the trigger was not put on hold) as well as being excluded from the lottery of the angel zone transition lottery described later are the angel zone transition lottery described later. Will be subject to the lottery}. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 said that the variation is a pseudo continuous variation (a variation in which the pseudo variation is executed at least once, and in this example, it is illustrated in FIGS. 21 and 22. It is determined whether or not the effect of A-1, A-2, B-2, etc.) is executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 wins the angel zone transition lottery with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) (changes the background effect to the angel zone background during fluctuation). Execute a lottery to see if or not. Next, in step 2276, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from "normal advance notice effect candidate-> special advance notice effect candidate after the special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, FIG. 21). In the case of A-1 and A-2, from the start of the fluctuation to 14 seconds, the content of the notice effect is determined from the "normal notice effect candidate", and after 14 seconds from the start of the change, which is the first middle row temporary stop timing. , Determine the content of the notice production from "Special notice production candidates"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the first main game symbol (the first in the pseudo continuous fluctuation) to a "special symbol" (background effect is changed to an angel zone). Based on the information about the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbol of the left column and the right column of the first decorative symbol is the same symbol (same as in the case of reach). (Stop mode), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2218). The temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-variation in the pseudo-continuous variation, and may be hereinafter referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

On the other hand, if No in step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, in step 2282, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "normal advance notice effect candidate". Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and next processing (process of step 2218). ).

In the second embodiment, in step 2274, the angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the variable angel zone transition is possible (the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle of fluctuation is set as a "special symbol", and the special symbol is used. It was configured to decide whether or not to move to the angel zone with the temporary stop as an opportunity), but it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo-continuous symbol (the first middle row temporary stop symbol) and the advance notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect may be determined from the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidates, "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 1", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 2", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice effect 3", "pseudo-ream symbol A, advance notice". Six combination candidates of "Direction 4", "Special symbol, notice effect 1" and "Special symbol, notice effect 2" are provided, and the combination of the pseudo-ream symbol and the notice effect is determined by lottery from the candidates, and the pseudo-ream is determined. When a combination of a pseudo-continuous symbol whose symbol is a "special symbol" and a notice effect is selected, it may be configured to shift to the angel zone in the middle of the fluctuation. The method of determining the combination of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the advance notice effect is not limited to the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, and the determination method may be used in the case of other variation modes. Further, the combination is not limited to the pseudo-continuous pattern and the advance notice effect, and may include a background effect, a sound mode, and the like.

In addition, as a method of determining the advance notice effect, first, the basic advance notice effect among the advance notice effects (a notice effect that can be executed regardless of the background effect being executed, an effect to be executed in the first half of the fluctuation, etc.) is determined. After that, based on the determined basic advance notice effect, a non-preliminary effect such as a background effect is determined, the determined effect (preliminary effect, background effect, etc.) is executed, and then the decision is made. Based on the basic advance notice effect and the effect that is not the advance notice effect such as the determined background effect, the undecided effect of the advance notice effect may be determined (the determination method is repeated a plurality of times). , It may be configured to determine all of the advance notice effects performed by the fluctuation). With this configuration, it is possible to determine the advance notice effect executed by the fluctuation at a plurality of timings, and it is generated by determining all the advance notice effects executed by the variation at one timing. It is possible to reduce defects in the production. In this example, (1) "fixed stop": the fixed stop is executed after the temporary stop, and if the fixed stop symbol combination is a big hit (three sets of the same symbol), the game shifts to the special game. , If there is a loss (not all three of the same symbol), the game does not shift to the special game. (2) "Temporary stop": The temporary stop is executed before the fixed stop (for example, shaking fluctuation) once. Pseudo-variation can be executed by temporarily stopping and then re-changing in the middle of fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation. (3) If a "special symbol" is displayed when the look-ahead effect is executed, the "special symbol" is regarded as a fixed stop. Not only is it displayed, but it is also configured so that it can be displayed as a temporary stop before a fixed stop. Further, in this example, the fixed stop and the final stop are synonymous, and "stop" is used for both the fixed stop and the temporary stop, but the stop symbol in the fluctuation of the main game symbol is the fixed stop symbol. The stop symbol in the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (when it is described that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc., the stop symbol is used. = It is a fixed stop symbol).

Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram showing an example of a notice effect / drawing stop symbol display. As shown in the upper part of the same image diagram, in this example, when shifting to the angel zone in the fluctuation, a normal background effect (an example of a background effect that is not an angel zone background effect) is being executed as a background effect. The "special symbol" is stopped as the first temporary stop symbol in the middle row. Further, triggered by the temporary stop of the "special symbol", the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped. In this example, the case of a big hit is illustrated, but the background effect is similarly switched even in the case of a loss. {For the temporary stop of the "special symbol" in this case, the left and right The decorative design may have a disjointed pattern (different design), but it may not be (the same design) (= the "special design" may be temporarily stopped after reaching)}.

In addition, as shown in the middle of the same image diagram, in this example, when other pseudo continuous fluctuations that do not accompany the transition to the angel zone are performed (when the angel zone transition lottery is not won), the normal background effect is used as the background effect. Is being executed, the temporary stop symbol that notifies the player that the pseudo continuous fluctuation, which is different from the "pseudo-continuous symbol A" (different from the "special symbol", is being executed, is being executed as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. ) Temporarily stops. Next, even after the "pseudo-continuous symbol A" is temporarily stopped, the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, in this example, under the situation where the normal background effect is executed as the background effect, if the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won while the decorative pattern is changing, it stops when the change is stopped. Lost symbols (separate eyes) stop as symbols. After that, the next fluctuation is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol of the fluctuation (that is, the fluctuation is the fluctuation before entering the look-ahead angel zone). Next, when the "special symbol" is stopped, the angel zone background effect is executed as the background effect from the next variation (that is, the next variation is the first variation in the look-ahead zone). In this example, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol change related to the hold scheduled to be digested before the trigger hold, it is not temporarily stopped except for the fixed stop (previous temporary stop). (It is not used when the symbol changes temporarily after being temporarily stopped as a pseudo-variation stop symbol). That is, in the symbol change related to the hold scheduled to be digested before the trigger hold, the symbol change related to the trigger hold is started from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → the pseudo change is executed and the symbol change is lost". It cannot be done until the angel zone background is displayed. As described above, in the second embodiment, the player can stop the "special symbol" by configuring the angel zone background effect to be executed when the "special symbol" is stopped (or temporarily stopped). By visually recognizing (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize the transition to the angel zone, and "special" not only at the time of variable stop (when stopped related to the confirmation display) but also at the time of temporary stop during change. It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the "design".

As shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" is stopped as a temporary stop symbol during pseudo continuous fluctuation, the same number in the left column and the right column is stopped (temporarily stopped) (at the time of reach). (Same as the stop mode) On the other hand, when the "special symbol" is stopped as the final stop symbol of the next change after winning the look-ahead lottery, different numbers (separate numbers) are stopped in the left column and the right column. There is.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means is set in step 2506 (second). The SM23 refers to the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and changes (a part of the pseudo continuous change) (or is put on hold) that triggered the transition of the "angel zone". Such fluctuations) {The fluctuations that triggered the transition of the "angel zone" (or the fluctuations related to the hold) are the fluctuations related to the trigger hold or the fluctuations related to the transition to the angel zone}. judge. In step 2506 (second), if Yes, the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

With the above configuration, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as decorative symbols, and is configured to be capable of executing a so-called hold look-ahead effect. Therefore, when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, the background change effect indicating that the expectation of transition to the special game is increased is executed. Then, for the hold that is in the digestion order before the hold (trigger hold) that triggers the hold look-ahead effect, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a fixed stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of the hold digestion. In this case, the meaning that the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed is "the symbol change has ended" and "the expectation for the transition to the special game has increased". On the other hand, regarding the trigger hold, since the "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as the temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of holding and digesting, the meaning of the "special symbol" being stopped and displayed in this case is , "The symbol fluctuation changes again" and "the expectation for the transition to the special game has increased". In this way, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, a novel production method is created in which the same type of "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the stop is displayed. Will be able to.

In the second embodiment, regarding the hold in the digestion order before the trigger hold, the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes at the time of the hold digestion. , Trigger hold is configured to be the same type of "special symbol" when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol when the symbol of the first decorative symbol changes during the hold digestion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be referred to as "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be referred to as "special symbol B". With this configuration, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning that the "special symbol" in both cases is stopped and displayed. Further, the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the former case may be lower than the probability that the "special symbol" is displayed in the latter case.

Further, in this example, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have three columns and one effective line, but there is no problem even if these are changed. For example, (1) "special symbol". The number of symbol rows and / or valid lines increases (for example, the number of valid lines becomes 9) (2) When the "special symbol" stops, the symbol row and / or valid lines increase. The number of lines decreases (for example, the number of symbol rows becomes two, and when one of the symbols stops, the reach state is reached. Furthermore, the number of symbol rows becomes one row, which means that it is a hit. May be configured to notify the difference in the profit margin attached to the player by the type of the symbol to be stopped and displayed).

(Example 1 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the "special symbol" has a different meaning depending on the timing (or situation) when the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed, but the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol" are used. It is possible to create a more innovative production method by further enhancing the interlocking with. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 1 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment to the first modification. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2220 (second variation 1) to step 2224 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is to hold the hold whose display mode has been changed by the hold look-ahead effect at the time of holding digestion. The content of the effect in the above is to be configured to be associated with the changed display mode. That is, in step 2216, the decorative symbol effect content is determined, the display update timing and the display update content are set, and then in step 2220 (second variation 1), the design reservation information display control means SM 22 uses the design reservation information. With reference to the temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the hold display mode related to the variation is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific hold display mode different from other hold display modes, which is red in this example). do. In the case of Yes in step 2220 (second variation 1), in step 2222 (second variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 determines the advance notice effect content from the "dedicated advance notice effect candidate". Here, the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is an effect candidate selected only in the variation related to the hold of the exclusive effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific hold display mode, and for example, at the time of the change. , It can be mentioned that the battle effect with a specific enemy character is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation related to the "dedicated notice effect candidate" is configured so that the jackpot expectation is relatively higher than that of other notice effect candidates. Next, in step 2223 (second variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone rushing flag in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (second variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol, and steps 2218. Move to. If No in step 2220 (second variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second variation). Here, if the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold display mode is the dedicated effect display mode, and the first decorative symbol It is possible to further enhance the interlocking with the fact that the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the second embodiment, the reserved effect display mode (red in this example), which is a specific hold display mode, is held as a notice effect candidate. By configuring so that the "dedicated notice effect candidate", which is an effect candidate selected only in the fluctuation related to the above, can be selected, at the time of executing the hold change effect (effect in which the hold display mode changes) based on the winning of the pre-reading lottery. , A notice effect that is executed only when the display mode is changed to a specific hold display mode can be provided, and by increasing the jackpot expectation when the effect is executed, the player can hold the hold when the change is made. By paying attention to the display color (holding change execution mode), the fun of the game will be enhanced. Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect executed by the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is not determined at the time of the occurrence of the trigger hold, but is determined at the time of digestion of the trigger hold. By configuring in such a manner, "trigger hold occurs-> hold display mode is determined and displayed in the display mode-> trigger hold is digested-> hold display related to trigger hold. The effect to be executed is determined by the symbol variation related to the trigger hold based on the aspect. " It should be noted that there is no problem even if the configuration related to the reserved digestion transmission image described later is applied to the modified example 1 from the second embodiment.

In addition, in the change example 1 from the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed as the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the hold display mode becomes the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), the notice effect content. Is configured to be selected from the "dedicated notice effect candidate", but the hold change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" is stopped as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol. It may be configured to further link the stop of the "special symbol" with, for example, "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as the "special symbol", and the "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, the hold change effect may be changed to a hold display mode other than red, while when the "special symbol B" is stopped, the hold change effect may be changed to a red hold display mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interlocking between the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol".

(Example 2 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, it is configured to further enhance the interlocking between the so-called hold look-ahead effect and the "special symbol", but this interlocking between the first main game side and the second main game side. The strength of the sex may be different, and an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 2 from the second embodiment, and the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment to the second modification. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) and step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the purpose of which is the first main. It is to control to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" according to whether it is a symbol variation on the game side or a symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, in step 2216, the decorative symbol effect content is determined, the display update timing and the display update content are set, and then in step 2226 (second variation 2), the design display content determination means SM21n temporarily stores the main side information. With reference to the means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (1) (second variation 2), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol, which will be described later. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (second variation 2), in step 2250 (2) (second variation 2), the marking display content determining means SM21n is described later in the second main game notice effect / drawing stop. The symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218.

Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of. Since the processing of this subroutine is the same processing as the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), the description thereof is omitted. It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side, but in the second modification from the second embodiment, the present process is the second. The purpose is to execute separate processes on the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side.

Next, FIG. 54 shows a second main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process according to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second variation 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second modification. It is a flowchart of. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only the differences from the processing will be described in detail. The difference from the advance notice effect / drawing stop symbol determination process of step 2250 (second) is step 2286 (second variation 2) and step 2288 (second variation 2), that is, in step 2256, in hold. When the trigger hold does not exist in, in step 2286 (second variation 2), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the variation is the variation related to the group C. Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2286 (second variation 2), in step 2272, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and is the variation a variation in which a pseudo continuous variation is executed? Judge whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (second variation 2), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 has a predetermined probability (the angel zone transition lottery winning rate on the first main game side executed in step 2274). The probability is lower than / 10, and in this example, the angel zone transition lottery that wins at 1/30) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2276. If No in step 2286 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2282.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine according to the change example 2 from the second embodiment, the angel zone transition lottery (pseudo) is performed by the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side. By configuring so that the winning probability of "special symbol" is temporarily stopped due to continuous fluctuation and the winning probability of whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as a background effect is different, the symbol changes on the first main game side. It is possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether there is a symbol variation on the second main game side, and thus the symbol variation on the first main game side. It is possible to widen the range of the production and enhance the interest in the production by making the accompanying production tendency different from the production tendency due to the pattern change on the second main game side.

In addition, in the change example 2 from the second embodiment, since the second main game hold cannot be the trigger hold in the non-time shortened game state, the second main game is set in the non-time shortened game state. The hold look-ahead effect for the hold on the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time shortened game state, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the first main game side is compared with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold look-ahead effect on the second main game side. Even so, the appearance rate is different (higher on the first main game side). Furthermore, as described above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the "special symbol" by the pseudo continuous fluctuation is the symbol variation on the first main game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. (The "special symbol" is temporarily stopped according to the symbol fluctuation on the first main game side), and the ease with which the trigger hold occurs is also the hold on the first main game side. , Because it differs depending on whether it is a hold on the 2nd main game side (the hold on the 1st main game side is more likely to be a trigger hold), a trigger hold occurs → a hold that is digested before the trigger hold "Special symbol" is confirmed and displayed at the time of digestion (so-called hold look-ahead effect is executed) → "special symbol" is temporarily stopped at the time of hold digestion of trigger hold (so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed). It is also possible to configure the probability that a series of production flows of the above will occur on the first main game side with a higher probability than on the second main game side. In addition, in the non-time shortened game state, the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation related to the first main game symbol and the pseudo continuous in the symbol variation related to the second main game symbol. The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol fluctuation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the fluctuation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as a look-ahead effect in the symbol fluctuation related to the first main game symbol, and the second main game symbol. When comparing the difference with the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation, the difference related to the pseudo continuous variation (the former difference) is smaller.

Further, in this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of the "special symbol" may be the same on the first main game side and the second main game side, and (2) a hold that becomes a big hit is held. When it exists in the 2nd main game hold, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect does not appear due to the fluctuation of the 2nd main game symbol. (3) There is a hold that becomes a big hit in the 1st main game hold. If so, the "special symbol" related to the look-ahead effect may appear in the fluctuation of the first main game symbol, and (4) the "special symbol" related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the case of a fluctuation that becomes a big hit of the second main game symbol. (5) In the case of a fluctuation that becomes a big hit of the first main game symbol, a "special symbol" related to the pseudo continuous fluctuation may appear or is likely to appear. Further, in the second modification from the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to appear at the time of the look-ahead effect or the pseudo continuous fluctuation, but the "special symbol A" can appear only at the time of the look-ahead effect. "Special symbol" and "special symbol B" are set as "special symbols" that can appear only during pseudo-continuous fluctuation, and the appearance rates of "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are compared to compare the appearance rates of the second main game symbol. The "special symbol A" may not appear in the variation, the appearance rate of the "special symbol B" may be low in the variation of the second main game symbol, and so on.

(Example 3 of change from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are configured to be executable as the so-called hold look-ahead effect, but a new playability is created by changing the execution mode of the hold look-ahead effect. It is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a change example 3 from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart of the sub-control board S side (particularly, the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment to the third modification. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2700 (second variation 3) and step 2750 (second variation 3), that is, after executing the decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200, step 2700 (2nd variation 3). In the second change 3), the sub-control board S executes the hold display mode change control process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second variation 3), the sub-control board S executes the hold digestion transmission image display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2300.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in the second embodiment to the third modification. The change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (second variation 3), the purpose of which is to notify that the hold is being digested (the symbol is changing) at the time of digestion of the hold. It is to configure the image of the above so that it can be displayed. That is, in step 2112, after subtracting 1 from the drawing hold counter value, in step 2130 (second variation 3), the drawing holding information display control means SM22 uses the holding information related to the symbol variation (particularly, the display mode). And the variation mode group information), "hold digestion transmission image information" {the hold display of the hold to be digested related to the start change, during the start change (the start change starts, the hold is Information related to the "holding digestion transmission image" that is continuously displayed even after being digested)} Temporarily stored (overwritten and stored) in the advance notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second). do. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-reading determination process at the time of winning the second main game is deleted (the pre-reading lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second variation 3) of FIG. 56 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. Here, this process will be described separately as a process related to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery and a process related to the look-ahead lottery. In the former process relating to the prohibition condition of the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2580, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is the second main game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold (a hold that is digested with priority over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes in step 2580, in step 2582, the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the hold variation mode group before the new hold becomes group 1. It is determined whether or not there is only (there is no hold that becomes a big hit before the new hold, a hold that can have a long fluctuation time, or a trigger hold). If Yes in step 2584, the process proceeds to step 2586.

Next, in the latter process related to the look-ahead lottery, first, in step 2586, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold variation mode group Judging whether or not it is in group 3 {Variation mode The fluctuation related to the hold in which the group is group 3 is even when the number of holds at the start of the change is large (for example, the number of holds is 2 or 3). , It will be a relatively long fluctuation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 2/3 when the hold is a big hit hold and 1/8 probability when the hold is a loss hold). Execute a look-ahead lottery at the time of winning. Next, in step 2590, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k adds information to the effect that the hold look-ahead effect is "trigger hold" to the new hold winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and displays the hold. The mode is determined to be "Yellow Zako Hold", and the information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has won the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning, and the display mode of the hold may be different from the normal hold. Next, in step 2592, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k is a hold change plan (hold change plan) until the trigger hold is exhausted based on the validity of the new hold (trigger hold) and the number of holds at the present time. For example, an execution plan for the effect of holding the green zako at the start of the next fluctuation, changing to the red zako hold at the start of the next fluctuation, etc.) is determined and stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

On the other hand, if No in step 2580 (when the new hold is the second main game hold), in step 2596, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k temporarily stores the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. This process is executed while deleting the information indicating that the game is "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold (if the hold having the information that the trigger is held does not exist in the hold). Instead of moving to the next process), the hold display mode is changed to "normal hold" (for example, white hold), and the hold information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and step 2594. Move to. If No is set in step 2582, step 2584, step 2586 or 2590, the process proceeds to step 2594.

Next, in step 2594, the hold look-ahead effect execution feasibility determination means SM26k determines the hold display mode of the new hold to be "normal hold" (for example, white hold), and the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information is stored in the temporary storage area of the reserved information, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118). Here, the processes of step 2596 and step 2594 newly occur in the second main game side priority digestion gaming machine as in this example when the hold on the second main game side exists (occurs). Since the hold on the second main game side is exhausted first, the planned fluctuation order is not obtained, and the look-ahead effect over multiple changes (for example, the hold display mode change effect based on the hold change plan) is not normally executed. It is a configuration to avoid.

Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation 3), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3) and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, After determining the variation mode of the first decorative symbol in step 2206 (second), in step 2208 (second variation 3), the design display content determining means SM21n (and the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n, reach effect display). The content determination means SM25n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {for example, when the variation mode related to the main game symbol is a short-time variation, it is not. If the reach is fluctuating for a long time, normal reach, super reach, etc.} is determined and used as the temporary storage means SM21b for information related to the display of the drawing (and the temporary storage means SM24b for the information related to the advance notice effect, the temporary storage means SM25b for the information related to the reach effect). Temporarily memorize. Next, in step 2216, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the result of the success / failure of the main game symbol and the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Based on the variation mode, the decorative design effect content is determined with reference to the decorative design effect table SM21ta-2 (for example, the decorative design effect table 1 to the decorative design effect table 2) in the lottery table SM21ta for determining the content of the design variation. The display update timing and display update contents are set, and the information related to the drawing display is temporarily stored in the temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (second variation 3), the drawing display content determining means SM21n draws and determines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the fluctuation. Here, as shown in the preview content image diagram on the right side of the figure, in this example, the content of the preview effect that can be executed differs depending on the image set as the background effect (so-called stay stage). It should be noted that the content lottery of the advance notice effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number acquired by the sub-main control unit SM side, the result of winning or failing the fluctuation, the winning symbol, the fluctuation time, and the like. Here, the content of the advance notice effect marked with a star in the same image diagram is the specific advance notice effect in this example, and is configured so that different specific advance notice effects can be executed based on the stay stage (specific advance notice effect). Will be described in the process described later). Further, the content of the advance notice effect (in this example, an effect that can be executed before the reach effect, etc.) is not limited to this, and for example, a pseudo continuous effect (an effect in which the pseudo continuous variation is executed) can be executed. It may be configured (in that case, the hold digestion transmission image described later or the display mode of hold may be changed in the pseudo-ream effect, or the hold digestion transmission image described later may be changed by the advance notice effect executed during the pseudo-ream effect. Or hold display mode may be changed).

Next, in step 2224 (second variation 3), the map display display content determining means SM21n refers to the “hold digestion transmission image information” temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the change is caused. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is related to the trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second variation 3), in step 2226 (second variation 3), the map display display content determining means SM21n uses the map reservation hold information temporary storage means SM22b (or the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b). ), Based on the "hold digestion transmission image information" related to the validity, fluctuation mode, or notice effect related to the change, the hold digestion transmission image change plan (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped: yellow zako hold → green zako Repeated button presses during hold and reach: change from green zako hold to red star hold, etc.) is determined, stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the process proceeds to step 2218. In addition, even if No in step 2224 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2218.

Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (second variation 3), the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21. , The hold display mode change process execution flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the hold display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the in-hold display mode change processing execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2704, in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not a trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 confirms the hold change plan stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change the hold display mode during the change based on the hold change plan.

In the case of Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 refers to the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and during the advance notice effect to be executed during the fluctuation, the specific advance notice effect (see FIG. 49). ) Is present or not. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is based on the notice mode temporarily stored in the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. , Determine whether or not the execution timing of the specific advance notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process proceeds to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold is changed according to the execution of the specific advance notice effect).

Here, FIG. 60 is a pending change image diagram in the specific advance notice production. In this example, an example in which the display mode of the hold is changed by the grass unevenness notice in the flat ground zone (particularly, the grassy spot notice in which a snake appears, which is a specific notice effect) will be described. First, in the state where the trigger hold exists in the hold, the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is the normal hold (white hold)}.

Next, the grass spot notice, which is the notice effect during the fluctuation, is executed, and an image of searching for something by squeezing the grass spot is displayed.

Next, an image in which a snake (the expectation of a big hit during the fluctuation is "low") appears from behind the grass is displayed.

Here, if there is no plan to change the hold display during the change, an image of the snake appearing from behind the grass and leaving the screen is displayed, and the advance notice effect ends.

On the other hand, if there is a plan to change the hold display during the change, an image of a snake appearing from behind the grass jumping into hold (trigger hold, which is normally held at this point) is displayed, unlike the case described above. NS. After that, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) in which the snake jumps changes, and the snake is displayed in a hold display mode (in this example, Zako hold) different from the normal hold. It should be noted that the specific advance notice effect may be configured to be able to execute an effect (so-called Gase effect) in which the display mode of the hold does not change even if the effect is executed.

On the other hand, if No in step 2712 (when the specific advance notice effect is not executed during the fluctuation), in step 2716, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 can execute the general-purpose hold change effect (can be executed independently of other effects). At the same time, it is an effect that can be executed in any effect stage. For example, a command for displaying a command for displaying a hold exploding effect is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Then, the process proceeds to step 2718.

Next, in step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold based on the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the drawing hold information. It is stored in the temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2720, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the holding display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the next process {step 2750. (2nd change 3) processing}. If No in step 2704, 2706 or 2710, the process proceeds to step 2720, and if No in step 2702 or 2714, the next process {process of step 2750 (second variation 3)} is performed. Transition.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the pending digestion transmission image display processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second variation 3) of FIG. 55 in the modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and whether or not the hold digestion transmission image display flag is off. Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transmission image based on the hold digestion transmission image information temporarily stored in the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. (Initial display mode) is determined. Here, the hold digestion transmission image is an image that continuously displays the hold related to the change even during the change (after the change starts and the hold related to the change is digested). .. By displaying the hold digestion transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the change is related to the Zako hold even during the change related to the hold (for example, Zako hold) whose display mode has changed within the hold. During the fluctuation, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image.

Next, in step 2758, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 turns on the flag for displaying the hold digestion transmission image in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, even if No in step 2754, the process proceeds to step 2760.

Next, in step 2760, the drawing reservation effect information display control means SM22 refers to the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and confirms the hold digestion transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a plan to change or delete the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image during the change based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan. do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the holding digestion transmission image based on the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the holding digestion transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not the change timing (for example, at the start of re-variation after the pseudo-continuous symbol temporary stop display, at the time of executing a predetermined effect, or at a predetermined period during the reach effect) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the conditions for changing the hold digestion transmission image display mode (for example, pressing the sub input button during a predetermined period, the maximum number of holds, etc.). Is determined whether or not is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768 and step 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect in which the hold explodes) (transmission of display command in step 2999). In addition to being transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process), the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan (for example, red star hold, green zako hold, no display, etc.) The display mode is changed), the information is stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780. In addition, even if No in step 2762 or 2766, the process proceeds to step 2780.

Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in the reserved digestion transmission image. The change in the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image in the change example 3 from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow as shown in the figure. In this example, a pattern in which the battle production shifts (develops) to the battle production (second half) without ending in the first half is illustrated. First, the fluctuation related to the trigger hold (currently, Zako hold) starts, and the Zako hold is displayed as the hold digestion transmission image.

Next, a battle effect (first half) is executed as the effect during the fluctuation. In this example, when the hold digestion transmission image is Zako hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the Zako hold by pressing the sub input button a predetermined number of times during the execution of the battle effect (first half) in the fluctuation. It is configured in. In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub-input button during the execution of the battle effect (first half), but the effect that encourages the player's operation (pressing the sub-input button) is Since it is not executed in particular, the operation of the sub input button is the input of a so-called hidden command (back button).

If you press the button repeatedly (press the sub input button a predetermined number of times) during the battle production (first half), every time you press the sub input button, an attack is added to the Zako hold displayed as the hold digestion transmission image. The effect image is displayed.

Next, when the number of times the sub-input button is pressed in the battle effect (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image in which Zako Hold, which is a hold digestion transmission image, explodes is displayed, and based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan, The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold is changed to red star hold or no display). Even after shifting to the battle production (second half), the hold digestion transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode is changed. Since there is an intention to predict the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation depending on the display mode of the transmission image, the hold digestion transmission image is continuously displayed in the display mode after the display mode is changed even after the transition to the battle production (second half). }.

On the other hand, if the button is not repeatedly hit in the battle production (first half) (or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined number), the Zako hold, which is a hold digestion transmission image, automatically explodes at the timing of shifting to the battle production (second half). At the same time as the image is displayed, the display of the hold digestion transmission image is erased (By not hitting the button repeatedly, the hold digestion transmission image change plan is taken into consideration for the player who enjoys not expecting the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation. The display is erased regardless of the contents of). In this example, the jackpot expectation of Zako hold is medium, and the jackpot expectation of Akaboshi hold is high. In addition, when the battle effect (second half) is executed, the jackpot expectation level rises at a stretch as compared with the case where the battle effect (first half) is executed. Here, in a situation where the jackpot expectation has risen after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako Hold, which has a medium jackpot expectation, is continued, the battle production is a production with a high jackpot expectation. Although it may spoil the interest of (second half), the production with high expectation {in this example, Zako hold) is performed at the timing when the production with high expectation {this example, battle production (second half)} starts. By erasing it, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly shown in this example, even if the number of times the sub-input button is pressed is less than the predetermined number of times, it is based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image. It may be configured so that the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image can be automatically changed. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image is automatically changed only when a change to the display mode suggesting that the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is high is planned. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not repeatedly hit (or the number of repeated hits is less than the predetermined number of times), the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is automatically changed at the predetermined timing only when the fluctuation becomes a big hit or a probability change big hit. It may be configured so that the so-called correct effect can be executed.

In addition, when shifting to the battle effect (second half) without going through the battle effect (first half) {For example, start of change in the drawing (all rows) → notice effect 1, temporary stop display of the drawing (left column) → temporary drawing Stop display (right column) → Reach development fanning → Battle reach (second half) Image display → Temporary stop display (middle row) → Perform production according to success / failure → Confirmation display (all rows) In the case of executing}, that is, when the period of repeated button presses {in this example, the battle effect (first half)} does not exist and the battle effect (second half) is entered, the timing of the transition to the battle effect (second half) Then, the Zako hold, which is the hold digestion transmission image, automatically explodes, and the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed and displayed based on the hold digestion transmission image change plan. Although not particularly shown in this example, the number of times the sub-input button is pressed required to change the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is highly expected to be a big hit in the fluctuation (hold display mode with high expectation). (If it can change to hold), it may be configured so that a larger number of times is more likely to be selected. Further, although not particularly shown in this example, when the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image changes, in addition to the general-purpose hold change effect, an effect suggesting the content of the change (for example, when the Zako hold explodes). It may be configured to be able to execute the end-of-life notice) that issues a line to. The contents suggested by the end-of-life notice suggest the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation and the production content scheduled to be executed (for example, "Achichii!" = Jackpot expectation 60% or more, "Congratulations!" = The jackpot is confirmed, "Boss!" = Battle reach development with the boss character, etc.), but if the player does not press the sub-input button, the jackpot expectation related to the fluctuation is calculated. Assuming that the player does not want to make a prediction, it is preferable to configure so that the end-of-life notice related to the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is not executed (only the end-of-life notice related to the production content to be executed can be executed). .. That is, only when the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is changed by the operation of the player, the advance notice effect related to the jackpot expectation of the change may be executed based on the result of the success or failure of the change. The production of the battle effect (first half) can be executed at "a4" and "b4", which are fluctuation times of 30 seconds.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 2764 (when it is not the timing to change the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image), in step 2772, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transmission image. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to erase. In the case of Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the display mode erasing condition of the hold digestion transmission image (for example, no sub-input button is pressed during a predetermined period, and the number of times the sub-input button is pressed. Is less than a predetermined number of times, etc.) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2774, in step 2776 and step 2778, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying a general-purpose hold change effect (for example, an effect in which the hold explodes) (transmission of display command in step 2999). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control process) and changed the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image to "no display" (changed to "no display" regardless of the contents of the hold digestion transmission image change plan. ), The information is temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the process proceeds to step 2780.

Next, in step 2780, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the holding digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the holding digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b. (Transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). On the other hand, if No in step 2752, in step 2782, the drawing reservation display information display control means SM22 turns off the holding digestion transmission image display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. .. Next, in step 2784, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image to “no display” and temporarily stores the drawing reservation information display control means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 displays the holding digestion transmission image based on the display mode of the holding digestion transmission image temporarily stored in the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b (the process). Then, a command (which will hide the pending digestion transmission image) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the next process (process in step 2300). Move to.

In the third modification from the second embodiment, the hold digestion transmission image can be displayed, but the hold digestion transmission image does not have to be displayed at all times. For example, the hold display mode is usually hold. The hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold that has been digested as it is may not be displayed, and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the hold whose hold display mode has changed from the normal hold may be displayed. With such a configuration, the player confirms the hold digestion transmission image at the timing when he / she wants to know the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation, and if the hold digestion transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high. If it is not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 46 in the third modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are from step 2524 (second variation 3) to step 2534 (second variation 3), that is, if the angel zone flag is off in step 2502, step 2524 (second variation 3). In the second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decorative symbol based on the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2524 (second variation 3), in step 2526 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b and holds the trigger in the hold {described above. It is determined whether or not there is a hold} that has been won in the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning the first main game. In the case of Yes in step 2526 (second variation 3), in step 2528 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone transition lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example). do. Next, in step 2530 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result of step 2528 (second variation 3) and determines whether or not the angel zone transition lottery has been won. .. In the case of Yes in step 2530 (second variation 3), in step 2532 (second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Turn it on and proceed to step 2504.

Further, after setting the "angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing reservation information in step 2534 (second variation 3). With reference to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is completed. If Yes in step 2534 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 2508, and if No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the sub-main control is performed for the highly expected hold (particularly, the hold on the first main game side) that becomes a big hit. When the display mode of the hold on the SM side can be changed and displayed, and a predetermined advance notice effect (in this example, a specific advance notice effect, particularly a low-expected advance notice effect) is executed, the predetermined advance notice effect is performed. It is configured so that the display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed according to the advance notice effect and the movement of the displayed image. As a result, even if the notice effect has a low expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation, the display mode of the hold may be changed, so that the player's interest in the notice effect can be increased and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible. In addition, when the big hit expectation rises after shifting to the battle production (second half), if the display of Zako hold, which has a medium big hit expectation, is continued, the battle production is a production with a high big hit expectation. Since the interest of (second half) may be impaired, even if there is no operation by the player, the high-expectation production {this example, the battle production (second half)} is not high-expectation production at the start (second half). In this example, it is possible to hide the Zako hold) and prevent the production from being spoiled. Further, it is a condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times) during the period during which the predetermined effect during the symbol change {for example, battle reach (first half)} is being executed. As a result, since the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image can be changed, the player can participate in the production, and the player who does not want to know the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation by the production can perform the predetermined operation. By not doing so, it is possible to provide a game in which the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image can be selected to be an effect that does not suggest a jackpot expectation (for example, deletion of the reserved digestion transmission image).

In addition, in the change example 3 from the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are provided as the look-ahead effect, and only the hold change effect is configured to be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect. Is not limited, and the background change effect may be executed a plurality of times during the execution of the look-ahead effect (for example, it may change to the "true angel zone background" even after the change to the "angel zone background"). In addition, in such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the greater the number of executions), the higher the expectation that the fluctuation related to the pre-reading effect during execution will be a big hit (rank). It is desirable to configure it so that it goes up). It should be noted that the background change effect does not change (ranks up) during the execution of the symbol change related to the trigger hold.

(Third Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to start and stop changing almost at the same time as the main game symbol, but the variation mode of the decorative symbol is not limited to this. .. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a third embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the third embodiment, a specific area C22 is provided inside the second large winning opening C20, which is an area that triggers a transition of the probability variation game state by entering the ball.

First, FIG. 64 (main game table 1 and main game table 2) shows the first main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game winning / failing lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first in the third embodiment. This is an example of the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). The difference from the present embodiment is that the jackpot probability in the probability-variable gaming state is lowered, and a short-open jackpot and a long-open jackpot are provided as jackpots. Here, the short open big hit means that the second big winning opening C20 is short-time (for example, 0.1) in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened) during the big hit. It is a big hit that opens only (seconds), and a long open big hit means that the second big winning opening C20 is open for a long time in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second big winning opening C20 is opened) during the big hit. It is a big hit that can be opened (for example, 30 seconds). In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the above-mentioned distribution game execution round, the game property shifts to the probability-variable game state after the end of the special game being executed. (So-called ball confirmation machine).

Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are examples of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference from this embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables that are referred to when the game is lost and the time is shortened, and the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation is "0". "And" 1 to 3 "are configured so that the contents of the table are different. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time-shortening game state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and the other variation modes are long variations. The method of determining the variation mode of the decorative symbol (particularly the first decorative symbol) differs depending on whether the variation mode of the second main game symbol is a short variation or a long variation (details will be described later). .. In the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed, only the symbol change on the second main game side is executed. Alternatively, the variation of the second main game symbol is easier to execute than the variation of the first main game symbol).

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the time-reduced game state, the fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol, so that the time-reduced game state is the first. 2 The fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of the symbol fluctuation (it may differ depending on the number of reservations).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed hitting, the second main game is performed). (Only the symbol change on the game side is executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, so the content of the change mode determination table related to the first main game symbol in the time-shortened game state is lost. In the case of a short-time (for example, 3 seconds) variation time, only one type of content may be used, and in the case of a big hit, a long-term (for example, 30 seconds) fluctuation time may be included in only one type (time). Since the symbol variation of the first main game symbol in the shortened game state is an irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the content of the variation mode determination table has a simple structure). In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during irregular symbol changes, the contents of the change mode determination table related to the first main game symbol related to the loss of the time shortened game state can be set for a short time regardless of the number of holds. It may be configured so that the variation mode of is not selected (for example, the variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of holds shown in the figure is not the total number of the first main game hold and the second main game hold, but the first main in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-A for determining the first main game variation mode. It is the number of game reservations, and in the case of the lottery table MN51ta-B for determining the second main game variation mode, it is the number of second main game reservations.

Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), the purpose of which is to end the probability-variable game state by the number of changes of the main game symbol (to the non-probability-variable game state). To migrate). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than 0. In the case of Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specific game control means MP50 decrements by 1 from the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1462 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. In addition, even if No in step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process proceeds to step 1470. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state ends when the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, it is configured so that the probability fluctuation game state does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations (it can end when the special game is won), and the jackpot related to the first main game Even if the ratio of the jackpot related to the second main game to the long opening jackpot is higher than the percentage of the jackpot related to the second main game, and the jackpot related to the second main game also has a short opening jackpot. good.

Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1608, or. When the special game execution flag is turned on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the currently executing round is a distribution game. It is determined whether or not it is an execution round (a round in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is opened, and in this example, 2R / 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612. Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and next The process proceeds to the process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, the process proceeds to step 1716. On the other hand, if No in step 1702, in step 1704, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (7A, 4B, It is 5B and 7B, and all the second main game jackpot symbols are long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 has a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, as an opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the ball entering the specific area C22 is substantially deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710. If No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 second) as an opening pattern of the second winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. An open pattern designed so that the non-ball entering the specific region C22 is substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710.

Next, in step 1710, the distribution game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second large winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

Next, in step 1716, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have won in the second major winning opening C20. do. If Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1720. On the other hand, if No in step 1716, in step 1718, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second special winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1718, the process proceeds to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second prize opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns off the distribution game execution flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1724, in step 1726, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game-related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1728. .. If No is set in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the distribution game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1634). Even if No in step 1718, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1634).

Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and determines whether or not the main game probability variation transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1668, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, if No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1672.

Next, in step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time reduction flag in the flag area of the specific game-related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1997).

Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third), that is, after executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol display content determination process in step 2200, step 2010 (third). Then, the sub-control board S refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300, and in the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub-control board S performs the time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol display control process described later. Execute and move to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is in step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, in step 2204, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2230 (third). The map display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206, and in the case of No, in step 2800 (third), the marking display content determining means SM21n The figure content determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2208. The process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (the symbol content determination flag does not exist). In the third embodiment, the first decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and an effective line (a line that becomes effective when the same numerical symbols are lined up) is 1. It is a line, and if the same number symbols are aligned on the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be lost). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop, or the frequency of appearance itself is extremely high. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped (or the probability of temporary stop is extremely low) while the symbol changes. The second decorative symbol is composed of three columns, a left column, a middle column, and a right column, and one effective line (a line in which the same symbol is valid to be lined up) is the same as the effective line. If the number symbols of are aligned, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same number symbols are not aligned on the effective line, it will be a loss). In addition, only numerical symbols can be stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left column, middle column, and right column (or in the middle column) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop), and the symbol is in the middle of change. It is configured so that it can be temporarily stopped.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the first drawing content determination process during the time saving, which is related to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the marking display content determining means SM21n uses the second main game hold content (particularly, the result of winning / failing and the fluctuation time) related to the symbol variation (variation of the main game symbol), and Check the contents of the second main game hold (particularly the variable time), which is the order of digestion of the first and second items, that is, the contents of the second main game hold (especially the result of winning / failing and the variable time) excluding the third hold. .. Next, in step 2806, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not there is a hold (including the symbol change) that has a fluctuation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more related to the confirmed hold. , Based on the digestion order of the hold (including the symbol variation) that has a variation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more, refer to the table for determining the first design variation mode during the time reduction, and refer to the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode.

Here, the right part of the figure is an example of the table for determining the first drawing variation mode during the time saving in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the number of the second main game held, the change of the second main game symbol, and the second main game are changed. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the fluctuation time related to the game hold. As described above, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is a long variation.

Specifically, when there are two or more second main game holds, it is determined whether or not the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold have a hold that causes a long change. If there is no hold that becomes a long fluctuation, the fluctuation time for the three fluctuations of the second main game symbol becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of 2nd main game hold is 3 and the number of 2nd main game hold is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2". In the case of "eyes: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the fluctuation" and "the fluctuation". The total of "1st" and "2nd" is 3 seconds, and the 1st decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or almost at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the 2nd hold is stopped. .. The second decorative symbol is configured to stop at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol stops at each variation.

On the other hand, if there are two or more second main game holds, and if any of the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold has a long change, the first is the first. The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long variation of the digestion order, is the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when the number of 2nd main game hold is 3 and the number of 2nd main game hold is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds, 2". In the case of "eyes: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" is "the fluctuation" and "the fluctuation". The total of 11 seconds with the "first" is 11 seconds, and the first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long fluctuation, is stopped.

In addition, when the number of the second main game hold is 1 or less, it is determined whether or not there is a hold that becomes a long change until the hold that becomes the final digestion order (including the symbol change), and the long change If there is no hold, the change time of the first decorative symbol is the sum of the change of the symbol of the second main game symbol and all the holds. For example, when there is one second main game hold and the number of second main game holds is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the change: 1 second, 1st: 1 second". The fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of reserved second main games is maintained at "1 to 3" is 2 seconds, which is the total of "the fluctuation" and "the first". The first decorative symbol will also be stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the holding of the eyes is stopped.

On the other hand, if there is one or less second main game hold, and if there is a hold that has a long fluctuation until the hold that is the final digestion order (including the symbol change), the first digestion order The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is a long fluctuation, is the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, when there is one second main game hold and the number of second main game holds is "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds". The fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of reserved second main games is maintained at "1 to 3" is 11 seconds, which is the total of "the fluctuation" and "the first", which is a long fluctuation. The first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially at the same time) as the fluctuation stop of the main game symbol related to the first hold.

In the third embodiment, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, the timing after the pending digestion, but the variation time is not limited to this, and before the pending digestion. At the timing, the second main game hold information may be confirmed to determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

Next, in step 2808, the drawing display content determining means SM21n refers to the hold information confirmed in step 2804, and determines whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information regarding the stop symbol of the main game symbol related to the hold that is the big hit, and steps Move to 2814. On the other hand, if No in step 2808, in step 2812, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol to be lost, and proceeds to step 2814. In the process of step 2812, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is reached according to the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbols in the left column and the right column are the same, for example, "4.6. It may be configured to determine whether the pattern is 4 ”) or a disjointed pattern (the stop symbols in the left column and the right column are not the same, for example,“ 4/6/3 ”). Next, in step 2814, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the time saving medium first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and next processing (step 2208). Process). Even if No in step 2802, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2208).

Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-reduced game state, the game is mainly advanced on the second main game side (since the game is advanced by right-handed hitting, the second). Since only the symbol change on the main game side is executed), the first main game hold basically does not occur, but the first main game hold occurs when the player executes a left-handed strike. In this case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same fluctuation time as the main game symbol until the variation related to the first main game hold is completed.

Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the time-saving and medium-decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the change of the main game symbol has started. In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, if No in step 2852, the process proceeds to step 2858.

Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2858, in step 2860, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2862, in step 2864, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, if No in step 2862, in step 2865, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and proceeds to step 2866.

Next, in step 2866, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 variablely displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, reach image display, etc. related to the change of the main game symbol, which has been determined. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in the time-reduced gaming state, but are not temporarily stopped in a stop mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo-continuous symbol. As a specific example of the temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is reach (the left column and the right column are temporarily stopped) due to the symbol variation which is the reach variation for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more). The second decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the period (), or the first decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous variation before the first decorative symbol reaches the reach. ..

Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the main game symbol has stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, in step 2872, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2872, in step 2874, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the first decorative symbol. Next, in step 2876, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1, and proceeds to step 2880. On the other hand, if No in step 2872, in step 2878, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol and proceeds to step 2880.

Next, in step 2880, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms and displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2882, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second design fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Even if No in step 2858 or step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Here, the upper part of the figure is a time-saving and medium-time decorative symbol variation image diagram, and exemplifies an example of the action related to the variation of the decorative symbol in the third embodiment. First, the "main game symbol change start state" means that the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) start to change at the timing when the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) starts to change. Whether or not it is displayed. The part indicated by the diagonal line indicates that the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is changing. In addition, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) stop fluctuating at the timing when the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) stops fluctuating. The part indicated by the diagonal line indicates that the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is changing. In this way, the second decorative symbol starts and stops fluctuating at the same timing (or substantially the same) as the fluctuation of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol) (according to the fluctuation of the main game symbol). The second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop fluctuating every three changes of the main game symbol (particularly, the second main game symbol). That is, the first decorative symbol is configured so that one symbol variation can be executed over a plurality of variation periods of the main game symbol (and the second decorative symbol).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the number of pending second main game hold and the variation time. By configuring the variation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the variation time of the second main game symbol a plurality of times, the game is as if the variation of the main game symbol a plurality of times is a single variation. It can be shown to a person, and even when the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol, which is the end condition of the probability fluctuation game state, is large (200 in this example) as in the third embodiment, the number of fluctuations is small (200 times in this example). For example, it can be shown to the player as if it is 100 times), and it is possible to reduce the continuous loss fluctuation during the probability fluctuation game state from boring the progress of the game, and also to reduce the probability fluctuation game. It is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot probability in the state is higher than it actually is.

In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol can be fixed and stopped three times during the period when the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped once, but the number of fixed stops of the second decorative symbol. The maximum number of 3 times is smaller than the 4 times, which is the upper limit of the 2nd main game hold. Because there may be a situation where all the second main game hold is exhausted).

The board surface configuration of the third embodiment may be changed. For example, when the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10 are hit right, the game ball almost certainly passes through. Arranged so as to vertically overlap on the route (the auxiliary game start port H10 is arranged on the upper side when viewed from the player), and almost all of the game balls that have flowed down the route and passed through the auxiliary game start port H10 are It may be configured so that the ball can enter the second main game start port B10. In such a configuration, in the time-reduced game state, during the period from when the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10 to when it enters the second main game start port B10, the "auxiliary game symbol Since it is desirable that it can be "start of fluctuation → end of fluctuation of auxiliary game symbol → opening of second main game start port electric accessory B11d", "variation time of auxiliary game symbol is 0.2 seconds, second main game start port electric It is preferable that the opening mode of the accessory B11d is such that the opening mode is 6 seconds open → closed. In addition, in such a configuration, in order to prevent a large number of game balls from entering the second main game start port B10 when right-handed is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game It is desirable that the number of prize balls in the starting port B10 is one (the number of prize balls in the first main game starting port A10 is three).

In the third embodiment, the contents of the second main game hold are confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. If a hold that is a long variation of the main game symbol exists by the second digestion order, the first decorative symbol is also configured to stop at the same time when the symbol change related to the hold that is the long variation is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol may not depend on the number of holds at the start of the change of the first decorative symbol, and the hold that occurs during the change of the first decorative symbol causes the first change of the next change. The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

In the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game holds, and there is a long change in either the symbol change, the first hold, or the second hold. When there is a hold that becomes, the change time until the change of the main game symbol related to the hold, which is the longest change in the digestion order, is configured to be the change time of the first decorative symbol. If there is no hold that becomes a long fluctuation in any of the symbol fluctuation and the first hold and the second hold, the fluctuation time of the three fluctuations of the second main game symbol is the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. Although it is configured to be a time, for example, when the number of the second main game hold is 3 and the number of the 2nd main game hold is maintained at "1 to 3", the fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second". In the case of "1, 1st: 1 second, 2nd: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second", the first decorative symbol when the number of 2nd main game reservations is maintained at "1 to 3" The fluctuation time is scheduled to be 3 seconds, which is the total of the "corresponding fluctuation", the "first" and the "second", but the second main game hold is not maintained at "1 to 3". For example, when the actual fluctuation time is "the fluctuation: 1 second, the first: 1 second: the second: 5 seconds", the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is "the fluctuation" and "the fluctuation". The total of the "first piece" and the "second piece" is 7 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol may differ depending on the presence or absence of additional pending occurrence.

In the third embodiment, the content of the second main game hold is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time related to the next variation of the first decorative symbol is determined. While stopped, the effect related to the first decorative symbol may be determined. For example, when a certain first decorative symbol change causes the effect display device SG to execute the "lightning bolt running effect" at the start of the change. In addition, while the first decorative symbol change is stopped, the subsequent change content of the second decorative symbol (or the change content of the second main game symbol) is confirmed, and the next first decorative symbol change is "lightning bolt". You may decide whether or not to execute the "running effect" again. In addition, the more the "lightning bolt running effect" is continuous, the higher the expectation that the first decorative symbol variation (or the main game symbol variation included in the first decorative symbol variation) related to the effect will be a big hit. It is desirable to configure it to be high. The timing for confirming the variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol) may be changed, but if it is confirmed at the variation start timing of the first decorative symbol, it is at the timing. When only the change contents related to the second main game hold can be confirmed, but when the change stop timing or the end end timing of the change of the first decorative symbol is confirmed, the first decorative symbol occurs during the period of change. 2 Since it is possible to confirm the change content of the main game hold, it is desirable that the confirmation timing be after the end of the change of the first decorative symbol.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail. It is not limited to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a right-handed instruction display indicating that right-handed hitting should be executed in a gaming situation in which right-handed hitting (a launching mode in which a game ball is launched toward the right side of the board) should be executed. It has a right-handed display control means SM27 that controls the display of the above.

First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 3400 (fourth), that is, when the execution of the iterative processing routine (b) of the sub-main control unit SM is started, in step 3400 (fourth). The sub-control board S executes the right-handed instruction display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of the right-handed instruction display control process according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In this example, it is determined in step 3402 whether or not the game is in the time-reduced game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the game is in the game state in which the right-handed hit should be executed (for example, the probability variation game). It may be configured to determine whether or not it is in a state, whether or not it is in a probability-variable gaming state and a non-time-shortening gaming state, etc.). If Yes in step 3402, the process proceeds to step 3406.

If No in step 3402, in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, in step 3406, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for displaying the right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Here, the upper right corner of the figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and is configured to be able to notify the player that the game should be proceeded by right-handed at present. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit right, the right-handed instruction display is configured so that the priority of the display priority is increased (details will be described later). The display basically always displayed on the effect display device SG, such as the second decorative symbol and the hold display (including the first hold display and the second hold display), which will be described later, is a right-handed instruction display. It may be configured so as not to overlap.

It should be noted that the right-handed display mode in each game state and situation may always be the same display mode even if the game state and situation (when the special game is being executed and when the special game is not being executed, etc.) are different. The display mode may be different depending on the state or situation (for example, the size may be different). Further, when the display mode is configured to be different, for example, during a big hit, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning opening, for example, the big winning opening. The right-handed instruction display during a big hit where all the opening modes are long open is a relatively large first display pattern, and the right-handed instruction display during a big hit where all the opening modes of the big winning opening are short open is relatively small. As the second display pattern, the right-handed instruction display during a big hit where long opening and short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the big winning opening is a relatively large first display pattern in the round where the big winning opening is long opening. Therefore, in a round in which the large winning opening is short-opened, it may be configured to proceed while switching the right-handed instruction display so as to have a relatively small second display pattern.

Further, when the first right-handed instruction display having a relatively small display area and the second right-handed instruction display having a relatively large display area can be displayed as the right-handed instruction display, the following is performed. It may be configured.
(1) In a situation where a player should hit right (for example, a time-saving game state), the first right-handed instruction display is configured to be displayed, and in the situation where the player should hit right, left-handed is played. When the machine detects (for example, when three game balls enter the first main game start port A10 which can be entered by left-handed in a time-reduced game state), the second right-handed instruction is displayed. Is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed instruction display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. Further, the display area of the first right-handed instruction display and the display area of the second right-handed instruction display do not overlap. The display area of the first right-handed instruction display and the display area of the second right-handed instruction display may be configured to overlap, and in such a configuration, the display priority of the second right-handed instruction display is prioritized. The display priority of the first right-handed instruction display may be higher than the degree.
(3) The display priority in the effect display device SG is "1st right-handed instruction display-> 2nd right-handed instruction display-> advance notice effect-> changing decorative pattern"("2nd right-handed instruction display". "Instruction display-> 1st right-handed instruction display-> notice effect-> changing decorative symbol"), for example, when the display area of the 2nd right-handed instruction display and the display area of the changing decorative symbol overlap. The second right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front side (becomes visible).
(4) The first right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the change during the auxiliary game state {during the change of the special symbol (during the change of the first decorative symbol, during the change of the second decorative symbol)}. (For example, when a "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged occurs), the second decorative symbol does not overlap. However, the first right-handed instruction display does not overlap with either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol while the fluctuation is stopped. Further, the first right-handed instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}, but a specific notice effect {for example, a dialogue notice (character's dialogue). It does not overlap with the notice to be displayed)}.
(5) The second right-handed instruction display may overlap with the first decorative symbol during the change during the auxiliary game state {during the special symbol change (during the first decorative symbol change, during the second decorative symbol change)}. (For example, not only when the "design enlargement effect" in which at least a part of the first decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device SG is enlarged occurs, but also during scrolling from top to bottom), It does not overlap with the second decorative pattern. Further, the second right-handed instruction display is a first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) and a second hold on the first main game side and the second main game side. It does not overlap with the display (see, eg, FIG. 87). Further, the second right-handed instruction display is a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice for displaying the character's line)}. Both can overlap.
(6) When the first decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (the first decorative symbol is changing, the second decorative symbol is changing), the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example,). (See FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87). Further, when the first decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (+ the first decorative symbol is changing), a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)} and a specific notice effect {for example. , Dialogue notice (notice to display the character's dialogue)}.
(7) When the second decorative symbol is in the special symbol change (the first decorative symbol is changing, the second decorative symbol is changing), the first hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (for example, (See FIG. 87) and the second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) does not overlap. Further, when the second decorative symbol is changing the special symbol (+ the second decorative symbol is changing), it may overlap with a predetermined advance notice {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}, but it is specified. It does not overlap with the notice effect of {For example, a line notice (a notice to display a character's line)}.
(8) The first hold display (for example, see FIG. 87) of the first main game side and the second main game side overlaps with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice for displaying a character's line)}.
(9) The second hold display on the first main game side and the second main game side (see, for example, FIG. 87) overlaps with a predetermined notice effect {for example, a group notice (see the lower right figure of FIG. 83)}. However, it does not overlap with a specific notice effect {for example, a line notice (a notice for displaying a character's line)}.

Further, when the display mode of the right-handed instruction display can be different depending on the game state and the situation, the configuration may be as follows.
(1) During the small hit execution, the right-handed instruction display is relatively small (for example, one arrow or the like), and the display mode is different from the case where the small hit is not executed.
(2) Probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, non-probability fluctuation game state and non-time reduction game state when the special game is not being executed, and special game execution. Is in a non-time reduction game state.
(3) The time-reduced game state includes a non-probability variable game state and a time-reduced game state, and a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state.
(4) When the special game is not being executed, the right-handed instruction display is not displayed in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state and the probability fluctuation game state and the non-time reduction game state. On the other hand, the right-handed instruction display is displayed during the execution of the special game (the display prompting the left-handed player is not displayed).
(5) In the time reduction game state, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display prompting left-handed player is not displayed).
(6) In the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state, when the above-described first right-handed instruction display and second right-handed instruction display can be displayed, the non-time reduction game state The display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different between the game state and the time-saving game state, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display prompting left-handed is an auxiliary game start port that makes it easy to enter the ball when performing right-handed in a predetermined period (for example, from a situation where right-handed should be made to a left-handed situation to a left-handed situation for a predetermined period). It is displayed (for a predetermined period from the detection of a right-handed hit such as when a game ball enters the ball) (it is hidden after the predetermined period has passed), while the right-handed instruction display is for situations where a right-handed hit should be made. The period during which the constant display or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

If No in step 3404, in step 3408, the right-handed display control means SM27 sets a command for erasing the right-handed instruction display, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100). In step 3408, if the right-handed instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram relating to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display mode and display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are illustrated by the combination of the gaming state and the background effect. In addition, all four display examples shown in the figure illustrate the situation where the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) related to "7A", which is the jackpot symbol on the first main game side, are stopped. ing. First, in the upper left of the figure, a case where the gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are arranged in a horizontal straight line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, an example is illustrated in which the gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “daytime stage”. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is a Chinese numeral, and the display position is such that three numbers are arranged in a convex shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "black" in both "777" and "777". The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both the case of "777" and the case of "777".

Next, in the lower left of the figure, a case where the gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up diagonally in a straight line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. Next, in the lower right part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the probability-variable gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "777", which is a Chinese numeral, and the display position is a concave shape in which three numbers are arranged. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is "777", which is an arithmetic number, and the display position is such that three numbers are lined up in a horizontal straight line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative pattern is "white" in both cases of "777" and "777". , The display color of the second decorative pattern is "black" in both the case of "777" and the case of "777".

Thus, in the figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(4) The display position of the first decorative pattern is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
It is configured as follows.

Further, when the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect and the game state, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is changed to a number and a pattern such as a character as shown in FIG. 98 described later. When the display mode is configured to be a combination of and, the display mode of the first decorative symbol may be different by differentiating the symbols (for numbers, Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals may be used. It may be different or the same). In addition, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can suggest the game state after the end of the big hit when the display color of the numbers of the decorative pattern is a big hit, the big hit is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is green. In that case, it is not certain whether or not the game will be in a probability-variable game state after the jackpot ends, but if the jackpot is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is red, after the jackpot ends, It may be configured so that the probability-variable gaming state is substantially definite. For example, in the non-probability-variable gaming state, "3" is green and "7" is red, while in the probability-variable gaming state. May be configured such that "3" and "7" are red (in the stochastic gaming state, "3" has the same properties as "7"). The difference between the properties of green and red is that when the big hit is started due to the stop of the green decorative symbol, the big hit with the number of execution rounds of 8 rounds (or 8 rounds or more) is started. Therefore, if the jackpot is started due to the stop of the red decorative symbol, the jackpot with 16 execution rounds may be started, or the green decorative symbol becomes the reach. In that case, the rate at which the symbol variation becomes a big hit is 10%, while when the red decorative symbol reaches the reach, the rate at which the symbol variation becomes a big hit is 50%. good. In addition, when the reach is "1", the ratio of the symbol fluctuation to the big hit is 10%, while when the reach is "7", the ratio of the symbol fluctuation to the big hit is 10%. It may be configured to be 50%. In addition, when the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the difference in the background effect and the game state, the display mode is different depending on whether or not the numbers of the first decorative symbol are accompanied by characters. It may be configured. For example, in the non-probability variable game state, the character "SUPER" is not attached to the "7" of the first decorative symbol, while in the probabilistic variable game state, the first decorative symbol "7" is not attached. May be configured to be accompanied by the characters "SUPER". In addition, in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially in the non-time reduction game state), the character "SUPER" is not attached to "7", and the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially in the time reduction game state). ), The character "SUPER" is attached to "7", or the character "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the first main game symbol (especially during the non-time reduction game state). , The probability that the character "SUPER" is attached to "7" in the big hit in the second main game symbol (especially in the time reduction game state) may be increased. Further, when the character "SUPER" is attached, the big hit of 16R is confirmed (a configuration in which the 16R probability variation hit is fixed), but when the character "SUPER" is not attached, the big hit of 16R is confirmed. May not be determined (a configuration in which the 16R probability variation hit is not determined) or a 4R jackpot may be determined. In addition, although the character "SUPER" may be attached to the first decorative design, the character "SUPER" is not always attached to the second decorative design. Further, the first decorative symbols other than "7" (particularly even-numbered symbols) are configured so that the characters "SUPER" are not attached even to the first decorative symbols.

Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram relating to the display area of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the area where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG is illustrated. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left corner of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed around the central portion of the display area SG10, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed around the upper left portion of the display area SG10. It is configured to be. As for the range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative symbol can be displayed in consideration of the execution of the SP reach effect and the execution of the big hit, the second decorative symbol has a range as shown in the upper right of the figure, and the first decorative symbol. Is the range shown in the lower right corner of the drawing. As shown in the figure, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative symbol can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative symbol can be displayed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the display does not move during the variable display, while the display of the first decorative symbol moves during the variable display (for example, the upper part of the display area SG10). Since it is configured to move from to the bottom), the moving range of the first decorative symbol is larger than the moving range of the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram relating to the variable display period of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the display when the SP reach effect is executed are illustrated. First, in the upper left corner of the figure, since the symbol of the main game symbol is changed, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. Next, in the upper right corner of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are reach-displayed. Next, in the lower left of the figure, a battle effect is executed as an SP reach effect, and during the execution of the battle effect, the player wants to pay attention to the battle effect (whether or not the result of the battle effect is a big hit). The display of the first decorative symbol is erased (hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed with the reach display, and when the player wants to check the status of the decorative symbol during the battle production, the display of the second decorative symbol is visually recognized to reach. You can recognize that it is inside. After that, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. In this way, while the main game symbol is changing, the display of the first decorative symbol is erased (during the execution of the battle effect), while the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed, so that the first decoration is displayed. The display period of the second decorative symbol is relatively longer than the display period of the symbol. Even when the first decorative symbol is displayed in reach, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to be displayed in reach. Further, even when the first decorative symbol executes the pseudo continuous variation described above, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to execute the pseudo continuous variation. Further, the second decorative symbol does not have to be displayed at all times. For example, the second decorative symbol may be hidden during the period when the first decorative symbol is displayed, or the display area SG10 may be covered as a specific effect. When such an effect having a large display area is executed, the second decorative symbol may be hidden (difficult to see).

Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram relating to the decorative symbol to be used in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. The first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number that is a common symbol between the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, as the second decorative symbol, when the first main game symbol fluctuates, an arithmetic number is used, and when "7A" stops, "777" stops.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the second main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7B" is stopped as the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. As for the first decorative symbol, "777" is stopped. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured to use the alphabet when the second main game symbol changes, and to stop "AAA" when "7B" stops. In this way, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are the same (design of the symbol display area and the symbol). Is the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are different (the designs of the symbols used for the variable display and the stop display are different). doing). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, the first hold display and the second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. When displaying on different display devices in both the decorative design and the hold display, any of the display devices may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices) or a liquid crystal display. It may be a device and an LED lamp.

Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram relating to the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, as in FIG. 80, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative symbol applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changed, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol is completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the jackpot symbol. It will be displayed. The first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number that is a common symbol between the first main game side and the second main game side, and in this example, "777" is stopped. Further, the second decorative symbol uses an arithmetic number, and "777" is stopped.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main game symbol is changing at a timing different from that of the upper part of the figure, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. After that, the fluctuation of the first main game symbol was completed, and the jackpot symbol "7A" (the same jackpot symbol as the upper part of the figure) was stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol, so that the first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol and The second decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol. The arithmetic number "333" is stopped in the first decorative symbol, and the arithmetic number "777" is stopped in the second decorative symbol. As described above, even when the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, the first decorative symbol has a plurality of types of stop display modes (“777”, “333”, etc.), while the second decorative symbol has. , When the stop symbols of the main game symbols are the same, only one type of stop display mode (“777”) exists. As a specific example of the candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, first, in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol is a big hit of 16R. Are "333" and "777", and in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 8R (or 8R or more), they are "111" and "555", and 4R (or 4R or more). In the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit, it is "222", "444", "666", and "888". Further, the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a 16R jackpot, and the stop suggesting that it is a jackpot of 8R (or 8R or more). In the case of the display mode, it is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode suggesting that it is a big hit of 4R (or 4R or more), it is only "222". Further, as another specific example, the candidate for the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol suggesting that the state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it becomes almost definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state) , "111", "333", "555", and "777", and do not suggest that the state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it is not definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state). Candidates for the stop display mode of the decorative symbol are "222", "444", "666", and "888". In addition, only "111" is a candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol, which suggests that the state shifts to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the big hit (it becomes almost definite to shift to the probability-variable gaming state). , "222" is the only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not suggest the transition to the probability-variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot (it is not certain that the transition to the probability-variable gaming state).

Next, FIG. 82 is an example of the display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, and those having a high display priority are shown in the upper row, and those having a low display priority are shown in the lower row. When the display content having a high display priority and the display content having a low display priority are displayed in an overlapping manner, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative symbol are displayed in an overlapping manner. As for the display of the overlapping part, the right-handed instruction display having a high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative symbol having a low display priority is displayed. Is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (it becomes invisible because it is hidden by the right-handed instruction display). In addition, since the display priority in this example is high, it is "error display-> right-handed instruction display-> power saving display-> second decorative symbol-> notice effect-> first decorative symbol-> hold display". Although the display priority may be changed, the display priority is changed for "error display", "right-handed instruction display", and "power saving display" because it has a large effect on the profit of the player. That is not desirable. Further, the order of the display priorities of the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display may be changed, but the display priority of both the notice effect, the first decorative symbol, and the hold display is the display of the second decorative symbol. It is preferable to configure it so that it is lower than the priority. In addition, it is desirable to display the "right-handed instruction display" in a position that is not hidden by other display objects (including the accessory YK, etc.), and the display content that has a higher priority than the "right-handed instruction display" is newly added. When provided, it is preferable that the area where the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area where the "right-handed instruction display" is displayed. In addition, the "power saving display" is configured so that it is not displayed during the execution of the symbol change.

Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to the priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the configuration related to the display mode of the decorative pattern applicable to the fourth embodiment is illustrated, and the configuration is different from that of FIG. 77 described above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and the right-handed instruction display is displayed under the situation that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed (the game state is). It is in a time-reduced game state, and in the time-reduced game state, it is a game that advances the game by right-handed). After that, the area where the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed overlaps with the area where the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display has a higher priority, so that the area is displayed in the foreground. Further, the second decorative symbol and the right-handed instruction display are configured so that the display areas do not overlap.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed, a flock of sheep appears as a notice effect. In the notice effect, the display area overlaps with both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and the priority is "second decorative symbol> notice effect> first decorative symbol", so that the sheep is displayed. When the first decorative symbol overlaps with the sheep display, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative symbol overlap, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the front. Become. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold display areas on the effect display device SG as in the first change from the fourth embodiment described later (hold display on the first main game side and hold on the second main game side). Even in the case where the display exists, the first hold display and the second hold display exist, etc.), the hold display area SG10 is newly provided at the lower left of the display area SG10 in the figure (shown). Even if the right-handed instruction display and the display area SG10 are configured so as not to overlap, such as the hold display in the upper right part of the display area SG10 is set as the first hold display and the newly provided hold display is set as the second hold display. good.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device SG. By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed even when the first decorative symbol is erased, it is a user-friendly gaming machine that can be confirmed even when the player wants to confirm the status of the decorative symbol. At the same time, even when it is desired to show the effect to the player such as the SP reach effect, the effect to be shown can be made more conspicuous by erasing the display of the first decorative symbol. Further, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative symbol to be higher than that of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is used in a situation where the status of the decorative symbol is to be confirmed when the first decorative symbol is hidden. It can be configured so that a situation in which the is invisible is unlikely to occur.

In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative symbol may be displayed as a combination of three symbols, while the second decorative symbol may be displayed as one symbol. In addition, there are four types of stop display modes for one symbol in the first decorative symbol, two types of stop display modes for one symbol in the second decorative symbol, and so on. The number of types of display modes may be larger than the number of types of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the probability that the stop display mode (display mode of the combination of the three symbols) of the first decorative symbol will be the same continuously over a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is higher than the probability that the second decorative symbol will be the same. It can be configured so that the probability that the stop display mode is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations is higher. In addition, two display areas of "○" and "×" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, and "○" is lit when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed by the big hit (or small hit) symbol. It may be configured so that "x" is lit and displayed when the symbol variation is lost. In addition, in such a configuration, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move on the display area SG10, and "○" or "×" blinks to notify that the symbol is changing. It may be configured as follows. Further, as the display area of the second decorative symbol, two display areas of the shape of "○" and the region of the shape of "☆" are provided, and when the first main game symbol fluctuates, the shape of "○" is provided. The variable display and stop display are executed in the area of, and when the second main game symbol fluctuates, the variable display and stop display are executed in the area of the shape of "☆", and "○" or "○" or By blinking "☆", it is notified that the symbol is changing, and when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed at the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "○" or "☆" is lit and displayed, and the symbol is displayed. When the fluctuation is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "○" or "☆" may be turned off, and when such a configuration is made, the first main is used in the first decorative symbol. The symbol used when the game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes are the same (the display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol are the same, and the player only visually recognizes the first decorative symbol. Then, it is a symbol in which it is difficult to distinguish between the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol, and may be configured as, for example, “777”). In the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when the first main game symbol fluctuates and the symbol used when the second main game symbol fluctuates are different (the areas for variable display and stop display are different). The design of the design of the variable display and the stop display is different). Further, as described above, when two display areas of the shape of "○" and the area of the shape of "☆" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol is used. When the big hit (or small hit) symbol is displayed as a stop, "○" is lit and displayed, and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol, "☆" is displayed. When it is lit and the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "○" is turned off, and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "☆" is displayed. When the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol, the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol is "333". It is possible to stop and display in a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "" and "777", and when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, "326" or " It may be configured so that the stop display can be performed in a plurality of types of stop display modes such as "761". With such a configuration, the number of types of stop display modes of the second decorative symbol is stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big hit (or a small hit). While there is only one type of stop display mode that can be obtained and there is only one type of stop display mode that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost, the first decoration As for the number of types of stop display modes of symbols, there are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) becomes a big hit (or small hit), and the main There are a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Example 1 of change from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device has been described in detail. It is not limited to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, and only the differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process, and then steps 3500 (fourth variation). In 1), the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2118-1 (fourth variation 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is suspended. After the information is temporarily stored in the hold information temporary storage area, after the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2116, or after the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is turned on in step 2111. If the player has not received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side, in step 2118-1 (4th variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the drawing hold counter value as the first hold display. The same number of hold images (holding display in the shape of a lamp on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (4th variation 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter value numerically on the effect display device SG as the second hold display, and next The process proceeds to the process (process of step 2200). The display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking of an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG. It suffices if the hold display and the second hold display are different.

Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth variation 1) of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, in step 3504, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. Even if No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

Next, in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3510, in step 3512, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the plot variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the decorative symbol variation start timing based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Determine if it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, in step 3516, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a variable display command for the decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). , Step 3526.

On the other hand, if No in step 3514, in step 3518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the pattern variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3518, in step 3520, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side. Is sent to), and the process proceeds to step 3526.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3526. Even if No in step 3522, the process proceeds to step 3526.

Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the information that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 3526, in step 3528, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the decorative symbol (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be). Next, in step 3530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2400). do. Even if No in step 3510 or 3526, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram relating to a change in the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the upper left of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is stopped and displayed. After that, the hold on the first main game side is exhausted and the next symbol change starts, so that the first hold display related to the first main game side and the second hold display related to the first main game side change. (The display that the number of reservations on the first main game side is 2 is changed to the display that the number is 1.). After that, due to the same symbol change, a hold on the first main game side occurs (a game ball enters the first main game start opening A10), and the number of holds on the first main game side changes. 1 The 1st hold display on the main game side and the 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side change (the display indicating that the number of holds on the 1st main game side is 1 is changed to the display indicating that the number is 2). To do). In this way, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed according to the hold digestion timing when the symbol change is started and the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start port. Is configured to change.

Next, in the middle left, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is displayed in a variable manner. After that, a hold change effect (an effect in which the display mode of the hold can be changed) is executed as a hold look-ahead effect during the same fluctuation. It should be noted that the effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the figure is an effect targeting the hold on the first main game side, and whether the display mode of the first hold display changes due to the flame hitting the first hold display. It is a production that incites whether or not. After that, as a result of the effect of the hold change effect, the first hold display on the first main game side changes, while the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. As described above, when the hold look-ahead effect is executed, the hold display can change only in the first hold display, and the second hold display is configured not to change. Even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold on the second main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side may change, while the second hold display on the second main game side is It is configured so that it does not change. It should be noted that the hold look-ahead effect is executed by the process exemplified in the second embodiment and the like described above.

As shown in the figure, the features of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows.
(1) When the number of holds is the same, the display mode of the first hold display may change, while the display mode of the second hold display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first hold display can change even if the number of holds is not increased or decreased (digestion of hold or occurrence of hold), while the display mode of the second hold display does not change unless the number of holds is increased or decreased.
(3) When an action is executed for the display related to the hold as the hold change effect and the effect that the display mode of the hold changes is executed, the hold display that is the target of the effect is the first hold display. The hold change effect is not executed for the second hold display.
It is configured as described above.

Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram relating to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the presence / absence and display mode of the first hold display and the second hold display in the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state, which can be applied in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, are shown. A configuration example is shown. First, in << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. The display mode of the first hold display differs between the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state (the first hold display related to the first main game side and the first hold display related to the second main game side). Both are different). In << Example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponding to the hold of the first main game side, the first hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side, and the first main game side. The second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side and the second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are displayed, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side. Neither the first hold display (the area where the first hold display is displayed) nor the second hold display (the area where the second hold display is displayed) is shared.

Next, in << Example 2 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction game state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Further, in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that the right-handed hit is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko machine (especially in the case of a game machine in which the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Since it is not so important to the player, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. Further, even in such a configuration, if the player is configured so that the number of holds on the first main game side cannot be recognized, the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed because it is not user-friendly. It is configured as.

Next, in << Example 3 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time reduction game state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Further, in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game is such that the right-handed hit is executed in the time-reduced game state, the second main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the second main game start port B10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko machine (especially in the case of a game machine in which the hold on the second main game side is preferentially digested over the hold on the first main game side), the hold on the first main game side is the player. Since it is not so important to the player, the first hold display on the first main game side may be hidden. In addition, the game is such that the left-handed hit is executed in the non-time shortened game state, the first main game symbol is changed (the game ball is inserted into the first main game start port A10), and the game is advanced. In the case of a pachinko game machine (especially when the second main game start port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball that has been left-handed), the hold on the second main game side is not very important for the player. , The first hold display on the second main game side may be hidden. Even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if the player cannot recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. Therefore, the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the figure, an example in which the configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display differs between the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability variation are not limited to this. The configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different from that of the game state, or the configuration related to the presence / absence of the hold display may be different due to the difference in the effect mode. In addition, the configuration in which the display mode of the first hold display is different but the display mode of the second hold display is not different due to the difference in the gaming state shown in << Example 1 >> is described in << Example 2 >> and << Example >>. It can also be applied to the configuration of 3 >>. As described above, as shown in << Example 1 >><< Example 2 >><< Example 3 >>
(1) When the gaming states are different (for example, between the non-time-shortening gaming state and the time-shortening gaming state, or between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability-variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state). , The display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same.
(2) When the effect modes are different (for example, the day stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold look-ahead effect is being executed and a stage other than the predetermined effect stage. (Or, depending on one of a plurality of types of effect stages that can be manually switched), the display mode of the first hold display is different, but the display mode of the second hold display is the same.
(3) When the gaming states are different (for example, between the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or between the non-probability variable gaming state and the probability variable gaming state, or depending on the type of limited frequency state). , The presence or absence of the display of the first hold display is different, but the second hold display is always displayed regardless of which game state is (however, priority is given to the hold display such as special game state or error state. When the information to be displayed is possessed, neither the first hold display nor the second hold display may be displayed).
(4) When the effect modes are different (for example, the day stage in FIG. 77 and the night stage in FIG. 77, or a predetermined effect stage indicating that the hold look-ahead effect is being executed and a stage other than the predetermined effect stage. (Or, depending on one of a plurality of types of production stages that can be manually switched), the presence or absence of the display of the first hold display is different, but the second hold display is displayed regardless of which production mode is used. Is always displayed (however, in the display mode where there is information that you want to display prior to the hold display such as the demo screen display and error display, neither the first hold display nor the second hold display is displayed. May be good).
It has such characteristics. The above features are applicable to both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram relating to the erasure of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. In addition, the number of reservations is 2 on the 1st main game side and 0 on the 2nd main game side. In addition, the decorative design corresponding to the first main game side is displayed in a variable manner. After that, the decorative symbol is displayed in reach with the same fluctuation, and then the battle effect is executed as the SP reach effect with the same variation. During the execution of the battle effect, the first hold display is erased (hidden) from both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second hold display is the first main game side. Both displays with the second main game side are continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the symbol variation during execution becomes a big hit. It is configured to erase the first hold display in order to occupy it (using most of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect. Further, even in such a configuration, if the player is configured so as not to recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side, it is not user-friendly, so the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are configured to always be displayed. In the figure, when the SP reach is executed, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second The configuration in which the hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed is shown, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a big hit (partially) The first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden even during the period (or always), but the second hold display (second hold display). (1) The second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) may be configured to remain displayed. When the SP reach is executed, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is hidden, but the second hold display (first hold display). The configuration in which the second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed may always be applied during the execution period of the SP reach, or may be applied during the execution period of the SP reach. It may be applied for some periods.

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the change example 1 from the fourth embodiment, two hold displays, a first hold display and a second hold display, are displayed on the effect display device SG. With regard to the first hold display, the display mode changes to suggest the jackpot expectation related to the hold, or the display is deleted when the player wants to pay attention to the SP reach effect. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game by setting the display mode (display / non-display) according to the situation and using it as a part of the production suggesting a big hit or the like. Further, in the second hold display, by configuring the display so as to always display and not change the display mode, when the player wants to confirm the current number of holds, the number of holds can be recognized without causing any doubt. It is configured as.

In addition, in the modification 1 from the 4th embodiment, the reserved digestion transmission image as illustrated in the modification 3 from the 2nd embodiment may be displayed. In such a configuration, the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the first hold display may be displayed, and the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the second hold display may not be displayed. The hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the hold display mode is the same as or similar to that of the first hold display. For example, the first hold display is a display having a shape of "○". In addition, when the display color is any of "red", "green", "blue", and "white", the hold digestion transmission image corresponding to the first hold display is also "○". , And the display color is any of "red", "green", "blue", and "white". In addition, the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested, and the display mode immediately after the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested. It may be configured so that the display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image and the display mode can be the same.

If the reserved digestion transmission image can be displayed, it may be configured as follows. In addition, only one of the following configurations may be adopted, or a plurality of components may be combined. In addition, one or more of the configuration in which only one of them is adopted or the configuration in which a plurality of components are combined and the configuration of << Example 1 >>, << Example 2 >>, or << Example 3 >> in FIG. 88 described above. May be combined with.
(1) In the non-time shortened gaming state, the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time shortened gaming state, both the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(3) In the time-reduced gaming state, the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed, but the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side is not displayed.
(4) In the time-reduced gaming state, both the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side and the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed.
(5) The hold digestion transmission image can be displayed in the non-time reduction game state, but the hold digestion transmission image is not displayed in the time reduction game state.
(6) The ratio of displaying the reserved digestion transmission image in the time-reduced game state is higher than the ratio of displaying the reserved digestion transmission image in the non-time-reduced game state (for example, the first main game in the non-time-reduced game state). Side hold digestion transmission image is always displayed)
(7) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the non-time reduction game state can be changed during the symbol variation.
(8) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the non-time shortened gaming state does not change during the symbol change (when the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(9) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side in the time-reduced game state can be changed during the symbol variation. However, the hold digestion transmission image of the second main game side in the non-time shortened game state changes during the symbol change rather than the rate at which the hold digestion transmission image of the first main game side changes during the symbol change in the non-time shortened game state. The rate of doing is lower.
(10) The display mode of the reserved digestion transmission image on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state does not change during the symbol change (when the reserved digestion transmission image on the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) The hold digestion transmission image is different from the above-mentioned hold display having two hold displays such as the first hold display and the second hold display, and the first hold digestion transmission image and the second hold digestion transmission image. It does not have two reserved digestion transmission images such as images, but only one reserved digestion transmission image.
(12) During SP reach, the first hold display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the hold digestion transmission image remains displayed.
It may be configured as described above. Further, in the above, the configuration related to the display of the hold digestion transmission image in the non-time shortened gaming state and the time shortened gaming state is described, but the "non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state" in the above configuration are described. "Is replaced with" a non-probability variable gaming state and a probabilistic variable gaming state ", or a configuration in which" is replaced with "effect mode A and effect mode B" may be applied.

(Fifth Embodiment)
Here, in the above-described embodiment, as the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to one main game symbol, two displays, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, can be displayed on the effect display device SG. , The configuration in which two decorative symbols are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG different from the above-described configuration is set as the fifth embodiment, and the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that a distribution start port unit C50 having a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 is provided. The details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later, but as shown in the figure, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided with a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10. , The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. Further, the game ball that flows down on the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down in the vicinity of the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd attached to the distribution start port unit C50. In the fifth embodiment, when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on, the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd is configured to be easily opened, so that the time reduction game state (auxiliary game time reduction flag is set). By executing a right-handed strike when it is on), the second main game start port electric accessory B11 hd is opened and the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 (second main game). The game ball that has entered the distribution start port unit C50 from the vicinity of the start port electric accessory B11 hd is difficult to enter into the first main game start port A10, and is easily entered into the second main game start port B10. ing).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as the configuration of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG, the second decorative symbol display area SG14, which is an area where the second decorative symbol can be variablely displayed, and the first decorative symbol are variablely displayed. The first decorative symbol display area SG15, which is the area to be obtained, the common hold display unit SG16 that displays both the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side, and the display related to the digested hold. It has a hold passage route SG17 through which a certain hold digestion indication is passed. In addition, on the upper part of the effect display device SG, an accessory that is a movable body accessory for the effect that is driven when an effect that encourages the player to determine whether or not it will be a big hit such as an SP reach effect is executed. YK is provided.

Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operation diagram of the distribution start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start port unit C50 has a common entry port C51 in which a game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and a game provided below the common entry port C51 and flowing down from the common entry port C51. A start port distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member that tilts in the left-right direction around a support shaft) for regularly distributing balls in the left-right direction and a start port distribution member C50y provided below the start port distribution member C50y. It also includes a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 provided below the start port distribution member C50y. The distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way tilts the game ball that has flowed into the common entry port C51 in the left-right direction of the start port distribution member C50y, as shown by the dotted line in the figure. Is configured to guide to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10. For example, the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the left is defined as the "first position", and the case where the starting port distribution member C50y is tilting to the right is "second position". In the case of "position", the game ball that has flowed into the common entry port C51 is guided to the first main game start port A10 side under the situation that the start port distribution member C50y is in the "second position". While the starting port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position", the game ball flowing into the common entry port C51 is the second main player under the situation where the starting port distribution member C50y is in the "first position". At the same time as being guided to the game start port B10 side, the start port distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". In this example, the tilting motion of the starting port distribution member C50y in the left-right direction is configured to be performed by the own weight of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the common entry port C51 is mechanically , The game balls are alternately distributed to either the first main game start port A10 or the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball toward one of them, 1 toward the other). It is designed with the intention of repeating the action of distributing individual game balls). In the fifth embodiment, the parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol are configured to be variable at the same time. Therefore, by having the distribution start port unit C50. , The hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side can be generated almost evenly, and can be frequently changed at the same time as the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Has been done.

Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in steps 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes the first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in steps 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determining means MN executes the second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). With this configuration, the change on the second main game side can start even when the first main game side changes, and the change on the first main game side also occurs when the second main game side changes. Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. Since this processing is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The fluctuation start condition is not during the special game (or the condition device is operating), and the first main game symbol is not changing (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not changing). ), And there is a hold of the main game symbol, and it is a condition that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since the parallel lottery can be executed, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol is changed when the process related to the first main game symbol is executed, but the first main game symbol is changing. If so, the fluctuation start condition relating to the first main game side is not satisfied.

Next, in step 1407-2, the game content determining means MN reads out the main game side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main game side random number from the hold information and shifts (holds digestion) the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determination means MN executes the main game symbol winning / failing lottery based on the main game side random number and the game state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determining means MN determines a stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game side random number and the result of the winning / failing lottery, and temporarily stores these in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN is based on the main game symbol winning / failing lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number). The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determining means MN uses the determined main game symbol information and game status information commands (commands to the sub-control board S side, symbol variation display start instruction command, etc.). To set. Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determining means MN sets a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main game symbol to the first main game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C1 (second main game) based on the variation mode. Set it in the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, in step 1407-9, the game content determining means MN uses the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On the part B21g), the variation display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determining means MN turns on the first (second) changing flag and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-1, in step 1407-11, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the first (second) changing flag is turned on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determining means MN is the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display device B20) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display unit B21g) is stopped, the display is controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-12, in step 1407-14, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, in step 1407-15, the game content determination means MN is the first (second) forced stop execution command (command to the sub side, and the first main game side is a big hit. In that case, a command to send information that the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss, and if the second main game side becomes a big hit, the information that the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss) is set. (It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determining means MN uses the first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the part B21g) is stopped with the stop symbol as a lost symbol, the lost symbol is displayed and controlled as a fixed stop symbol, and the process proceeds to step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the changing second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, and the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. When stopped at a symbol, the fluctuating first main game symbol is configured to be forcibly stopped due to loss. Further, when the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss, a command for forcibly stopping to the sub control board S side is set immediately before the forcible stop. (The effect when the sub-control board S side receives the command will be described later).

Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determining means MN sends information (symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that the symbol variation ends to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. Set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determining means MN turns off the first (second) changing flag, and proceeds to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determining means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-19, in step 1407-20, the game content determining means MN turns on the condition device operation flag and proceeds to step 1450. On the other hand, if No in step 1407-19, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing the process of step 1407-20.

Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the above-mentioned specific game end determination process, and shifts to the next process (process of step 1500). Even if No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used when determining the variation mode of the main game table 3 and the second main game symbol used when determining the variation mode of the first main game symbol in the fifth embodiment. It is the main game table 3 to be played. Since the contents of the table are the same as those in the second embodiment, the explanation is omitted. It should be noted that the content of the effect corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbol will be described later.

Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side in the fifth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth), that is, sub. When the execution of the iterative processing routine (b) of the main control unit SM is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the symbol standby display control process described later, and in step 2100. Transition. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the hold information management process in step 2100, the sub-control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process described later in step 2200 (fifth), and proceeds to step 2300. do. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, the sub-control board S executes the second decorative symbol display control process described later in step 2350 (fifth). The process proceeds to step 2400. Further, after the sub-control board S executes the special game-related display control process in step 2400, the sub-control board S executes the background effect control process described later in step 2500 (fifth). Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub-control board S executes the accessory drive control process described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of the symbol standby display control process according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and displays the standby preparation flag (both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped). Determines if the flag that can be turned on when done) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, in the decorative symbol display control means SM21, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are newly stopped and displayed (the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). Whether or not the second decorative symbol is newly stopped and displayed in the situation, or the first decorative symbol is newly stopped and displayed in the situation where the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed) judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in step 2056, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t (it is an increment timer, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed). (Timer for measuring the elapsed time since then) is started. Next, in step 2058, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. In addition, even if No in step 2052, the process proceeds to step 2060.

Next, in step 2060, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t, and the timer value is the standby execution value (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area is put into the standby state. It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has exceeded 20 seconds). In the case of Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area in the standby state. The standby state ends when either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. Here, the right part of the figure is an image diagram of the decorative pattern display area. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol are used. It is configured so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and one of them is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. The main area is configured so that the area that can be displayed is larger than the sub area. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and a number, and the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area is displayed only as a number (number). The first decorative design is an arithmetic number, and the second decorative design is a Chinese numeral). Further, as illustrated in the figure, under the situation where the first decorative symbol is displayed as a picture and a number in the main area, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. When 20 seconds have passed since then, the display of the first decorative symbol in the main area is configured to display only the symbol. The display of only this pattern is called the standby state. The main area and the sub area may be provided in the same liquid crystal display (for example, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG), or may be provided in separate devices. As a specific example provided in separate devices, for example, an effect display device A and an effect display device B are provided as the effect display device, the effect display device A has a main area, and the effect display device B has a main area. It may have a sub-area, and in such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. good. Further, the number of effect display devices and the number of decorative symbol display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) may be three or more (providing a first area, a second area, a third area, etc.).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t and stops. Next, in step 2066, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). .. Even if No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2100).

Next, FIG. 98 is an image diagram of a decorative pattern display mode in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative design displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and a number, and the decorative design displayed in the sub area is displayed only as a number. The numbers displayed in the symbols are arithmetic numbers, and the numbers displayed in the second decorative symbol are Chinese numerals. In addition, the number of types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is four each. Although the details will be described later, the display mode of the decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold, which is a hold related to whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed, is a first sub-region symbol table or a second sub-region symbol table. Is configured to be determined with reference to, that is, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative symbol when the trigger hold is present. And the display mode of the second decorative pattern is the same.

Next, FIG. 99 is the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, in step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means. After the SM22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 decides that the hold to be digested this time is the hold related to the first main game side. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the hold display that is variablely displayed in the main area in the main route (hold pass route). A command for executing a hold digestion display (a production in which the player can recognize that the hold has been digested) passing through the area, which will be described in detail later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2132 (fifth), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in the standby state. do. In the case of Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the sub route (the area through which the hold display that is variablely displayed in the sub area in the hold pass route passes. The command for executing the hold digestion display passing through (details will be described later) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2138 (fifth). If No in step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold digestion display on the first main game side, or when the hold is digested in the standby state, the hold digestion display is executed on the main route and waits. When the hold on the second main game side is digested in a situation other than the state, the hold digest display is executed on the sub route.

Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not a trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the hold change display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2116. On the other hand, if No in step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S shifts to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the pending change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the hold digest is a hold digest that passes through the first main route after the trigger hold occurs. In the case of Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger hold is a hold that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for the jackpot, and based on the number of holds at the time of trigger hold occurrence, the hold change scenario (to trigger hold). A scenario for determining when and how the hold display mode related to the trigger hold changes before the symbol change is started) is determined.

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a loss are shown as a pending change scenario determination table. As shown in the figure, the hold change scenario is related to the number of holds when the trigger hold occurs (the number of holds that will be consumed before the trigger hold at the time when the trigger hold occurs) and the trigger hold. It will be determined by the result of the success or failure of the symbol change. In addition, the illustrated "before 1 change" is the hold display mode immediately before the trigger hold is exhausted, and the jackpot expectation degree of the hold display mode of the "1 change before" (when the trigger hold is a big hit). The ratio of the case of a big hit to the total of the case of losing and the case of losing) is "rainbow color-> red-> blue" from the highest. In addition, the hold display mode is configured to change for each symbol change, but as the trigger hold approaches, the hold display mode does not change or changes to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. It is configured to go. That is, it is configured so as not to change to the hold display mode in which the jackpot expectation is low as the trigger hold is approached, and the player's expectation for the trigger hold is not impaired.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for the jackpot, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and performs the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2116). Further, in the case of No in step 3054, in step 3060, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for the time of loss, and determines the hold change scenario based on the number of holds when the trigger hold occurs. do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for the time of loss, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and performs the next process (process of step 2116). ). Even if No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2116).

Here, in the lower part of the figure, a table for a big hit and a table for a loss are shown as a hold passage route display color determination table. As shown in the figure, the display color of the hold passage route is determined by the result of the success or failure of the symbol change related to the trigger hold. The jackpot expectation of the hold passage route display color (the ratio of the jackpot to the total of the case where the trigger hold is a jackpot and the case where it is lost) is "rainbow color → red → blue → no change" from the highest. It has become. It should be noted that the hold passage route is configured to be determined only by the first hold digestion timing after the trigger hold occurs, but is not limited to this, and is configured to fluctuate and change every time until the trigger hold is digested. You may. In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode so that the jackpot expectation is low as the trigger hold is approached, as in the case of the change in the hold display mode (hold change effect) described above. .. Further, regarding the change of the display mode of the hold display mode and the display mode of the hold passage route display color, although the timing of the change in the symbol change is not specifically shown, the advance notice effect during the symbol change at the start of the symbol change. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed at various timings according to the execution timing, the hold occurrence, the hold digestion, etc., and the player can always change the display mode according to the effect to be executed. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the hold display mode or the hold passage route display color will change to a display mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high. In the fifth embodiment, the expected degree of jackpot of the trigger hold is suggested by the hold pass route display color which is the display color of the hold pass route SG17 (when the trigger hold is a big hit, the trigger hold is lost. The display color of the hold passage route is more likely to change than in the case, or the display color of the hold passage route is more likely to be the display color with high expectation of big hit), but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the hold digestion transmission image is displayed. When the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image is displayed and the display mode is configured to indicate the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation related to the hold digestion transmission image, the hold passage route display color is used. , The display mode of the hold digestion transmission image may be different, that is, the jackpot expectation suggested by the hold digestion transmission image may be different, or the display mode of the hold digestion transmission image may change easily. It may be configured to be different. In addition, the effect content of the symbol variation related to the digested hold that has passed through the hold pass route SG17 may differ depending on the hold pass route display color (the rate at which the effect with a high expectation of big hit is executed may differ). You may.

Next, FIG. 101 is a hold occurrence display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be executable, a situation in which the hold of the first main game side and the hold of the second main game side exist at the same time frequently occurs. However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display unit SG16 which is common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. In addition, regardless of whether the hold that occurred is the hold of the first main game side or the hold of the second main game side in the order of the numbers "1 → 2 → 3 ... → 8" shown in the figure. Instead, it is configured to be displayed on the common hold display unit SG16 in the order in which the hold occurred (the most recently generated hold is displayed in the first area, and the hold display that has already been displayed is "1 → 2". It will be displayed with a shift like "." The hold display mode is also the same for the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game can be obtained simply by visually recognizing the common hold display unit SG16. It is configured so that it cannot be determined whether it is the hold display on the side or the hold display on the second main game side.

Next, FIG. 102 is a reserved digestion display image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of display in the common hold display unit SG16 when the number of holds is four is shown. As shown in the figure, two holds on the first main game side and two holds on the second main game side are displayed, and the first hold on the first main game side is "A1". "B1", which is the hold of the second main game side, "A2", which is the hold of the first main game side, is displayed in No. 2, and "B2", which is the hold of the second main game side, is displayed in No. 4. Has been done. Under such circumstances, the hold display when the hold has been exhausted will be described in detail below.

The middle part of the figure is an example of the order of symbol changes related to the above-mentioned four holds, and the lower part of the figure is an example of how the hold display is erased in the common hold display unit SG16. With reference to these, the state in which the symbol variation in the fifth embodiment is executed and the hold display is erased will be described in detail. First, when the symbol change related to A1 which is the hold on the first main game side starts execution, the hold display of the first area which is the hold display related to A1 is deleted, and the remaining hold is shifted and displayed. NS. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: B1, No. 2: A2, No. 3: B2". Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol change on the second main game side is executed at the symbol change start timing related to A1. Ten seconds later, the symbol change related to B1, which is the hold on the second main game side, is started to be executed. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". Then, 20 seconds after the start of the symbol change related to A1, the symbol change related to B1 ends. The symbol change related to A1 is changing. When the symbol change related to B1 is completed, the hold related to B2 is digested and the symbol change is started. However, in the display on the common hold display unit SG16, the hold display related to "A2" is displayed. It is configured so that the hold display of the first area that has been used is erased. That is, apparently, from the state where the 1st and 2nd areas in the common hold display unit SG16 are lit, the display in the 1st area is turned off, and then the display in the 2nd area is the 1st area. It will be shifted to. On the other hand, since the hold actually digested is the hold related to "B2", the display in the first area is the hold display related to "A2". As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold display displayed in the first area is displayed regardless of whether the hold actually digested is the first main game side or the second main game side. It will be erased (turned off).

Next, FIG. 103 is a reserved passage route image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the reserved passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area SG10. The hold passage route has a main route which is an area through which the hold display which is variablely displayed in the main area passes, and a subroute which is an area where the hold display which is variable and displayed in the sub area passes. First, the left part of the figure is an example of a case where the hold digestion display when the hold is digested passes through the main route. In a situation where the player is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). The case where "A1", which is the hold on the first main game side, is digested first will be described. First, when "A1" is digested, the hold display of the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol change on the first main game side related to the hold of "A1" is executed in the main area, the hold digestion display related to "A1" passes through the main route and heads toward the main area. Become. Next, the right part of the figure is an example of the case where the hold digestion display when the hold is digested passes through the subroute. In a situation where the player is not in the standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area), and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area). The case where "B1", which is the hold on the second main game side, is digested first will be described. First, when "B1" is digested, the hold display of the first area is erased, and the hold digest display moves toward the hold passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol change on the second main game side related to the hold of "B1" is executed in the sub area, the hold digestion display related to "B1" passes through the sub route and goes toward the sub area. .. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the area through which the hold digestion display in the hold pass route SG17 passes is the sub route, which is the main route, depending on whether the symbol variation is executed in the main area or the sub area. Is configured to be determined.

Next, FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the first main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 have been deleted, that is, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game even when the hold on the second main game side exists. It is configured so that the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the first main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time reduction game state. It may be configured to be possible. Further, the pre-reading lottery on the first main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, when the hold occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change start timing of the main game symbol and the change of the main game symbol are not limited to this. The look-ahead lottery may be executed even at the timing in the middle.

Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of the second main game winning pre-reading determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), that is, in step 2602 (fifth), the means for determining whether or not the hold look-ahead effect can be executed. The SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not it is in the current time reduction gaming state. If Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604, and if No in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2118).

Further, when the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2608 that the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit, in step 2610 (fifth), the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/3) is won, the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. Further, when the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26 determines in step 2612 that the new hold is a hold of the group C, in step 2616 (fifth), the hold look-ahead effect execution possibility determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability. (In this example, 1/10), the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even when the hold on the first main game side exists, the look-ahead effect related to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In this example, the look-ahead effect on the second main game side is configured to be executed only in the non-time reduction game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is also executed in the time reduction game state. It may be configured to be possible. Further, the pre-reading lottery on the second main game side can be executed only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of the pending occurrence, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change start timing of the main game symbol and the change of the main game symbol are not limited to this. The look-ahead lottery may be executed even at the timing in the middle. Further, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the winning rate is the same as the pre-reading lottery winning rate on the first main game side.

Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the map display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the map display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2249-3, the map display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the trigger hold does not exist in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the marking display content determining means SM21n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and the first 1 Determine the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 2249-8, the marking display content determining means SM21n is in the flag area of the marking display-related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first symbol content determining flag (for the symbol variation on the first main game side). A flag that is turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-5, in step 2249-10, the symbol display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the newly digested hold is a symbol variation from the standby state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the marking display content determining means SM21n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and the second 2 The stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-15. In this way, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate from the standby state, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. It is configured as. If the decorative symbol newly changed from the standby state is the second decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol starts to change during the change of the second decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol changes. Previously, the second decorative symbol was variablely displayed in the main area, but when the first decorative symbol started to fluctuate, the first decorative symbol was variablely displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol was displayed in the sub area. Even if the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate, the second decorative symbol is continuously variablely displayed in the main area, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. It may be configured to be variable display. As described above, since the decorative symbol newly changed from the standby state is the second decorative symbol, when the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative symbol is displayed. , The display of the first decorative symbol and the pattern in the main area are the same, and the display of the numbers is different (the first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral).

If No in step 2249-10, in step 2249-13, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as a sub-area. Next, in step 2249-14, the marking display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and the second 2 Determine the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the map display content determining means SM21n executes the main area interrupt process A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the marking display content determining means SM21n is in the flag area of the marking display-related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the second symbol content determining flag (for the symbol variation on the second main game side). A flag that is turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 3350 (fifth).

Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the drawing display content determining means SM21n executes the effect content determining process described later, and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). If No in step 2249-3, the look-ahead display control process described later is executed in step 3150 (fifth), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). Even if No in step 2249-1, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main game symbol starts to change in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is changedly displayed in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in situations other than the case where the interrupt effect is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always displayed in a variable manner in the main area (even in the standby state). , The second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be configured to be variablely displayed in the sub-region.

Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of the effect display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n executes reading of the winning / failing lottery result related to the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the winning / failing lottery result and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol, and determines the symbol variation. Determine the content of the production. Next, in step 3358, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content related to the symbol variation, temporarily stores the first half priority, and temporarily stores the next process. (Processing in step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Further, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, when the symbol variation is the symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines the winning / failing lottery result and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the effect content related to the symbol variation is determined with reference to the second decorative symbol effect content determination table. Next, in step 3362, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines the priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content related to the symbol variation, temporarily stores the priority, and performs the next process (process of step 2300). ). The priority will be described later.

Next, FIG. 108 is an example of the first decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the hit / fail result and the fluctuation time (variation mode) of the first main game symbol, and is interrupted by the determined effect content. It is configured so that the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not to execute the effect, are determined. It should be noted that the case where the hit / fail result is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol variation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the first half priority is given but the second half priority is not given. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 109 is an example of the second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect content related to the second decorative symbol is configured to be determined by the hit / fail result of the second main game symbol and the fluctuation time (variation mode), and is interrupted by the determined effect content. It is configured to determine the priority, which is an element that determines whether or not to execute the effect. Note that, unlike the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol does not have two priorities, the first half priority and the second half priority, but has only one priority. It should be noted that the case where the hit / fail result is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3102, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n is in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the interruptable flag (the determined symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is changed. Turn on the flag that turns on when the interrupt effect is a feasible variation. Next, in step 3108, the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n is in the flag area of the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and the character initialization flag (the character YK is directed to the initial position). The flag for operation) is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Even if No in step 3104 or step 3108, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2249-15). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, after determining that the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-region, the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is interrupted (variably displayed in the sub-region). It is configured to determine whether or not the variation is feasible (the effect of exchanging the display area between the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area). Further, when it is determined that the second decorative symbol can be interrupted, the position of the accessory YK is confirmed, and when the accessory YK is in operation, the accessory YK is driven to the initial position. It is configured to control. With this configuration, details will be described later, but at the timing of executing the interrupt effect (the first timing of the plurality), the ratio of the accessory YK stopped at the initial position is increased. be able to.

Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the look-ahead display control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3152, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3152, in step 3154, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3154, in step 3156, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the first look-ahead area, and proceeds to step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, during the execution of the look-ahead effect (from the start of execution of the first symbol variation after the trigger hold exists to the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold), the first decoration The display area of the symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to change, and the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the lower left of the display area SG10 as in the pre-reading effect display device image in the lower part of the figure. One area is provided, and a pre-reading second area in which the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided in the lower right portion of the display area SG10, and the pre-reading first area and the pre-reading second area are configured to have the same display area. Has been done. Further, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed only by numbers, which is the same as when displayed in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device having the larger display area) has two decorative symbols (first). The decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) may be configured to be variablely displayed (or stopped and displayed).

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, if No in step 3154, in step 3158, the marking display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as “look-ahead first area → enlargement at SP reach”, and step 3158. Move to. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the symbol variation related to the trigger hold is executed during the pre-reading effect execution, the variation of the decorative symbol related to the trigger hold is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display area SG10 to reach the SP. It is configured to perform the production. The decorative symbol that is not enlarged (for example, when the first decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed, the second decorative symbol) is variablely displayed at a position that does not overlap with the enlarged decorative symbol display area. Just do it. Next, in step 3158, the design display content determining means SM21n refers to the first sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and refers to the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode. As described above, since the variation mode of the decorative symbol during the pre-reading effect is determined with reference to the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table, the display mode of the decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region. Only the numbers similar to are displayed. Next, in step 3160, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2300). ).

Further, if No in step 3152, in step 3162, the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 3162, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the pre-reading second area, and proceeds to step 3168. If No in step 3162, in step 3166, the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as "look-ahead second area-> expansion at SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is the hold related to the first decorative symbol or the hold related to the second decorative symbol, it is enlarged and displayed when the symbol change related to the trigger hold is executed. It is configured as. Next, in step 3168, the symbol display content determining means SM21n refers to the second sub-region symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol, and refers to the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol. Determine the variation mode. Next, in step 3170, the map display content determination means SM21n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the map display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2300). ).

Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316. After the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol in step 2324, and then the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328. Alternatively, when it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image, in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 uses the main control board M. It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2344 (fifth), in step 2346 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is a variable display area (a main area or a sub area when the look-ahead effect is not being executed). ) Set the stop display command (confirmed display) to stop the first decorative symbol with the forced loss symbol, and the process proceeds to step 2340. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail in FIG. 114.

Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of the second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, in step 2368, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2374. Even if No in step 2366, the process proceeds to step 2374.

Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the second symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2374, in step 2376, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 uses the second decoration based on the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2378, in step 2379, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the second decorative symbol (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). ), And the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

On the other hand, if No in step 2378, in step 2380, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a variation mode temporarily stored in the second design variation time management timer SM21t-2 and the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2380, in step 2381, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) for the second decorative symbol (in the display command transmission control process in step 2999, the sub-sub control unit. It is transmitted to the SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2380, in step 2382, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) has the first drawing variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the advance notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). Is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth). Even if No in step 2382, the process proceeds to step 3200 (fifth).

Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the main area interrupt process B, which will be described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2384, in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the second main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example,). With reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the information indicating that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side). In the case of Yes in step 2385, in step 2386, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a stop display command (confirmed display command) for the second decorative symbol (sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). Will be sent to). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the main area interrupt process C, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

If No in step 2384, in step 2388, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second decorative symbol in the variable display area (main area or sub area when the look-ahead effect is not being executed). Set the stop display command (confirmed display) to stop with the forced loss symbol, and proceed to step 2390. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail in FIG. 114. Next, in step 2390, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol changing flag in the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next process (process of step 2400). Move to. Even if No in step 2374 or step 2385, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2400).

Next, FIG. 114 is a symbol display image diagram at the time of a big hit in the fifth embodiment. First, a case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area, which is shown in the upper part of the figure, is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, since the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the main area (“777” in the figure). Further, since the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. The forced loss symbol of the second decorative symbol is "giraffe", and the symbol is stopped and displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the sub area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed).

Next, a case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub-area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area. After that, since the second main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed in the sub area (“777” in the figure). Further, since the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol. The forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo", and the symbol is stopped and displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. Further, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the forced loss symbol, the background effect in the main area becomes a special background effect (background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol and the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to loss, the second decorative symbol is displayed as a stop. And the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to the loss due to the second main game symbol stopping at the jackpot symbol. Is configured so that the display mode is different. As shown in the figure, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area is different from the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue", and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be "red". Further, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be the same. The display mode may be partially the same (only the colors are the same but the patterns are different, etc.).

Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol, and it is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. In the case of Yes in step 3202, in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is turned on when the interrupt enable flag (in the main area interrupt process A described above, the change of the second decorative symbol itself can be interrupted). It is determined whether or not the flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, in step 3206, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation state of the first decorative symbol during the fluctuation is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative symbol, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation in which SP reach is not executed, only the first half is possessed. It is not supposed to be.

In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the priority of the first half of the first decorative symbol changing in the main area and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub area. Are compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3206, in step 3210, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 gives priority to the latter half of the first decorative symbol changing in the main region and the priority of the second decorative symbol changing in the sub region. The degree is compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. Next, in step 3212, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol. The priority of the first decorative symbol is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory YK is not operating (in a state where the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). It is determined in the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is operating (a state in which the accessory YK is operating with a trigger other than the interrupt effect). The mode of producing the interrupt effect when the execution is started) is determined, a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3220. In this way, when the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative symbol, the interrupt effect can be executed, but the accessory YK is in the initial position. It is configured so that the effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not the interrupt effect is stopped. In the fifth embodiment, the interrupt effect is an effect that is executed when the big hit expectation of the symbol variation is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high), so that the player is conspicuous (the player is conspicuous). It is preferable to carry out in a flashy) production mode. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal display (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the accessory than only the effect display on the liquid crystal display (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interrupt effect while the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, the effect when the interrupt effect is executed by configuring the accessory YK to operate at the initial position when the accessory YK is operating when the main area interrupt process A is executed. As an aspect, it can be configured so that the ratio of selecting the effect mode when the accessory is not activated increases. The interrupt effect (interrupt effect executed at the first interrupt timing) in steps 3216 and 3218 may be referred to as a first interrupt effect.

Next, in step 3220, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3222. In addition, even if No in step 3202, step 3204 or step 3212, the process proceeds to step 3222. Here, the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is variablely displayed. In the case of a big hit, if the display areas of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not changed, the second decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub area, which is a smaller area than the main area, is the big hit symbol. It stops at, and the joy of being a big hit for the player is reduced. Therefore, by executing the interrupt effect and setting the variable display of the second decorative symbol, which is the jackpot, as the main area, the jackpot symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

Next, in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3222, in step 3224, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol is the timing 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3224, in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being changed is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, in step 3228, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is in operation as the effect during the change of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2384). In addition, even if No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228 or step 3230, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2384). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even if it is not determined at the first interrupt timing that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol, at the second interrupt timing. When the following conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed as the second interrupt effect.
(1) While the second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) The fluctuation of the second decorative pattern is a big hit,
(3) The priority of the second decorative symbol that is changing is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or higher.
(4) The accessory YK is not operating as a production during the change of the first decorative pattern.
When the above conditions are satisfied, the interrupt effect is executed.

Although not shown, the second interrupt effect is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not operating. Therefore, it is preferable to use the effect mode in which the accessory YK is activated. Is. Further, the effect mode of the second interrupt effect may be an effect mode in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative symbol is a symbol variation that becomes a big hit when the accessory YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub-area, the interrupt effect is executed and the first The decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area. However, when the interrupt effect is completed, that is, the symbol on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect. If the fluctuation is a loss, the timing at which the change of the second decorative symbol related to the interrupt effect ends, and if the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the interrupt effect is a big hit, the timing at the end of the big hit. The first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing shown in FIG. It may be the timing immediately before the stop or the timing immediately before the fixed stop of the symbol fluctuation. Further, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times in one symbol change period, the symbol may be changed. Further, when the interrupt effect is executed, or when the display areas of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are exchanged, for example, when the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is generated. When the first decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed in the sub area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed. Until the end, the display areas of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not exchanged (during the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol in which the interrupt effect is executed, the next variation of the first decorative symbol starts. Even when this is done, it is preferable to keep the second decorative symbol variable and displayed in the main area).

Next, FIG. 116 is an image diagram of interrupt effect execution in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of the effect mode when the accessory is operated is illustrated. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol, and when the first interrupt timing is reached, the accessory YK is operating as an effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol. In this case, the interrupt effect is executed, but since the accessory YK cannot be operated as the interrupt effect, the effect mode of "liquid crystal display only" (the effect mode in which the accessory YK does not operate) is set. The interrupt effect will be executed. In the figure, it is shown how the accessory YK, which was operating as an effect related to the first decorative symbol, returns to the initial position.

Next, in the lower part of the figure, an example of the effect mode when the accessory is not activated is illustrated. First, in a situation where the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variablely displayed in the main area and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area, the second decorative symbol is displayed. When 5 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation and the first interrupt timing is reached, the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to operate the character YK as an interrupt effect, the interrupt effect is executed in the effect mode of "liquid crystal display + character operation" (the effect mode in which the character YK operates). It will be. In the figure, it is shown that the accessory YK is operating in the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupt effect related to the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol being changed is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, in step 3254, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the third interrupt effect as the interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 2390). Even if No in step 3252 or 3254, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2390). In this way, even when the interrupt effect (second interrupt effect) cannot be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the pattern variation of the executed second decorative symbol is a variation that becomes a big hit, (2) execution. When both of the two conditions that the priority of the second decorative symbol is the predetermined value (3 in this example) or more are satisfied, the third interrupt effect is performed as the interrupt effect at the stop timing of the second decorative symbol. Is configured to run. The stop timing of the second decorative symbol is referred to as the third interrupt timing. In addition, as the production mode of the third interrupt effect, since the execution of the third interrupt effect = the start of the big hit, the production mode for congratulating the player who has confirmed the big hit and the same production as at the start of the big hit are performed. It may be configured to run. Further, it may be an effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. Further, as the effect content related to the variation of the first decorative symbol, the effect mode of the third interrupt effect may be different depending on whether the accessory YK is operating or not.

Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of the background effect control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect-related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the pre-reading flag (the flag that is turned on when the pre-reading effect is executed) is turned off. Determine if it exists. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol in the first main region after the trigger hold occurs has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2528, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger hold, and based on the result of whether the trigger hold is correct or not, until the calculated time elapses. Pre-reading notice to determine the production scenario. Here, the lower part of the figure is an image diagram of the advance notice effect execution during pre-reading. The figure illustrates how the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario is determined and the pre-reading effect is executed. First, at the fluctuation start timing of the first decorative symbol after the trigger hold occurs (the fluctuation start timing of the decorative symbol whose fluctuation start of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is earlier), the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold ends. The time until is calculated, and the pre-reading advance notice production scenario in the relevant period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the display of "hot" is executed as a dialogue notice. After that, when 40 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the cut-in effect is executed. After that, when 60 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the effect of operating the accessory YK is executed. After that, when 70 seconds have passed from the first symbol change start timing, the symbol change related to the trigger hold ends. In the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. Therefore, when the advance notice effect is executed based on the fluctuation time of one symbol change, the advance notice effect related to any of the symbol changes is performed. Is executed, that is, there is a risk that it will be recognized which symbol change is related to the trigger hold, and the interest of the symbol change related to the hold other than the trigger hold will be reduced. I will end up. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the advance notice effect according to the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first decorative symbol after the trigger hold occurs, the interest of the entire look-ahead effect is enhanced.

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the “pre-reading background” as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. As described above, the "look-ahead background" is configured to be set first in the case of Yes in step 2526, that is, at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the first main area after the trigger hold occurs. In other words, the timing of switching from the "normal background" to the "pre-reading background" is the start timing of the symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is "pre-reading background", as described above in FIG. 111, a pre-reading first area in which the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided in the lower left portion of the display area SG10. , A pre-reading second area in which the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed is provided in the lower right portion of the display area SG10, and the pre-reading first area and the pre-reading second area are variablely displayed side by side in the same display area. It will be. If No in step 2522, in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the trigger hold has been completed. In the case of Yes in step 2534, in step 2536, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the look-ahead flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2538. In addition, even if No in step 2524 or step 2526, the process proceeds to step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. If No in step 2534, in step 2540, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "pre-reading background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 3300 (fifth)}. It should be noted that there is no problem in any display mode as long as the "look-ahead background" and the "normal background" can be visually identified by the player.

Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the accessory drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content related to the symbol variation is newly determined. In step 3302, it is determined whether or not the effect content is determined when the pre-reading effect is not being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the accessory YK is scheduled to operate in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the variation mode of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation and the effect content, and proceeds to step 3314. Further, if No in step 3302, in step 3308, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario is newly determined. In step 3308, it is determined whether or not the effect content when the look-ahead effect is being executed is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the accessory YK is scheduled to operate in the newly determined effect content. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the pre-reading advance notice effect scenario, and proceeds to step 3314. In addition, even if No in step 3304, step 3308 or step 3310, the process proceeds to step 3314.

Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines that the accessory initialization flag (the change in the second decorative symbol is an interruptable change). It is determined whether or not the flag for operating the accessory YK to the initial position, which is turned on when the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the time of determination, is on. In the case of Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory TK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the accessory initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. In addition, even if No in step 3314, the process proceeds to step 3320. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is determined to be an interruptable variation, if the accessory YK is operating from the initial position, the operation is performed. It is configured to execute control to return the character YK to the initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not it is the current execution timing of the interrupt effect. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupt effect to be executed is an interrupt effect in an effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. As the interrupt effect in which the accessory YK is activated, for example, the interrupt effect (first interrupt effect), which is an effect mode when the accessory is not activated, is executed at the first interrupt timing, and the second interrupt effect is executed. The third interrupt effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory YK based on the effect mode of the interrupt effect, and shifts to the next process (process in step 2999). Even if No in step 3320 or 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed in parallel on the effect display device. By configuring the lottery to be feasible, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is designated as the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is designated as the second decorative symbol. The symbol variation of the above and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be displayed at the same time. Further, the first decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the sub area smaller than the main area, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. When the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation related to the above is high, the variation display of the decorative symbol to be shown to the player can be displayed by executing the interrupt effect to display the display of the second decorative symbol in the main area. It can be made to look bigger in the main area, and the fun of the game will be enhanced.

(Example 1 of change from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in the main area, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the sub area, and the second When the priority of the decorative symbol is high (for example, the expectation of a big hit is high), the interrupt effect is executed to display the second decorative symbol in the main area. However, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The display mode of is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration will be referred to as change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 2249-16 (fifth variation 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 2249-3, the drawing display content determining means SM21n is reserved. If it is determined that there is no trigger hold within, in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), the symbol display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation from the standby state. .. In the case of Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth variation 1), the design display content determining means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), the drawing display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold related to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n provides information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on this, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined with reference to the first main area symbol table, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n relates to the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

Further, in the case of No in step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), the device drawing display content determining means SM21n has a newly digested hold on the first main game side. Judge whether or not it is on hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n sets the display area of the decorative symbol to the previous first decorative symbol symbol. Determine the same display area as the fluctuation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n uses the first main area symbol table or the first sub based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. With reference to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Further, in the case of No in step 2249-21 (fifth variation 1), in step 2249-24 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n sets the display area of the decorative symbol to the previous second decorative symbol. The display area is determined to be the same as the symbol variation of. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n uses the second main area symbol table or the second sub based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. With reference to the area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the marking display content determining means SM21n determines whether or not the display area of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation is a sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3100 (fifth), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2249-15. As described above, in the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in the non-standby state, the previous symbol is used in both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. It is configured to fluctuate in the area (either the main area or the sub area) that was displayed as fluctuating due to fluctuations. In addition, when the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate in the standby state, it is newly changed from the standby state regardless of whether the decorative symbol that newly starts to fluctuate is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol that started to change is displayed in a variable manner in the main area, and the decorative symbol that started to change later is displayed in a variable manner in the sub area.

Next, FIG. 121 is an example of the second decorative symbol effect content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, since it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, the first decorative symbol is also used in the second decorative symbol. Similar to the decorative symbol, the determined effect content is configured to determine the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements that determine whether or not the interrupt effect is executed. It should be noted that the case where the hit / fail result is a big hit has a relatively higher priority than the case where the result is a loss. In addition, the case where the fluctuation time is long has a relatively higher priority than the case where the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of execution of the SP reach effect (super reach effect) in the symbol variation, and the second half priority is the priority related to the period after the start of execution of the SP reach effect. In the symbol variation (effect content) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the first half priority is given but the second half priority is not given. The priority is any number from "0" to "3".

Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3112 (fifth variation 1), step 3102 (fifth variation 1), step 3104 (fifth variation 1), step 3114 (fifth variation 1), and step 3116 (fifth variation 1). 5 variation 1), that is, in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variablely displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. In the case of Yes in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3102 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 3104 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). Further, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth variation 1), in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative symbol related to the symbol variation. .. In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth variation 1), in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display content determining means SM24n sets the first half priority of the confirmed first decorative symbol to a predetermined value (in this example). 2) Determine whether or not it is greater than or equal to 2). In the case of Yes in step 3116 (fifth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, both the case where the first decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area and the case where the second decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the sub area are both cases. Since it is configured so that the interrupt effect can be executed even in the case, it is determined whether the variation of the decorative symbol currently displayed in the sub area is the variation in which the interrupt effect can be executed. Further, since the timing of executing the process is the timing before the start of SP reach (the timing before the start of symbol fluctuation), the first half priority is confirmed as the priority.

Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth variation 1), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316, the decoration is performed in step 2324. After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command related to the timing in step 2328, or in step 2326. When it is determined that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the preview image or the reach image, in step 3200 (fifth variation 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs the main area interrupt process, which will be described later. B is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2344 (fifth).

Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth variation 1) of FIG. 123 in the modification 1 from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the changing decorative symbol is changing in the sub-region. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt process B in the figure is executed by the first decorative symbol display control process, the first decorative symbol is determined and the second decorative symbol is determined. When the decorative symbol display control process is executed, the determination is made for the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub-region has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub-region at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect. It is configured to determine if it is. If Yes in step 3237, in step 3238, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, in step 3239, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol being changed in the main region is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the decorative pattern, the part before the start of SP reach is the first half, and the part after the start of SP reach is the second half, and in the variation in which SP reach is not executed, only the first half is possessed. It is supposed to be.

In the case of Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main area with the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub area. , Step 3242-1. On the other hand, if No in step 3239, in step 3241, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the latter half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main region and the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub region. Compare and move to step 3242-1. Next, in step 3242-1, whether or not the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has a higher priority than the decorative symbol whose variation is displayed in the sub-region is higher than the priority of the decorative symbol whose variation is displayed in the main region. Is determined. The priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. In the case of Yes in step 3242-1, in step 3242-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3242-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the effect mode of the interrupt effect to the effect mode when the accessory is not activated (the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position). In the state, it is determined in the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3242-2, in step 3242-4, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 activates the accessory YK in the effect mode at the time of the accessory operation (the accessory YK is activated by a trigger other than the interrupt effect). In this state, it is determined in the effect mode of the interrupt effect when the execution is started), a command for executing the determined interrupt effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3242-5. In this way, when the first half priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the sub area is larger than the first half priority or the latter half priority of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is executed. Although it is configured to obtain the interrupt effect, the effect mode of the interrupt effect differs depending on whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position.

Next, in step 3242-5, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and proceeds to step 3242-6. In addition, even if No in step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the process proceeds to step 3242-6.

Next, in step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, in step 3242-7, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3242-7, in step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol changing in the sub-region is a big hit symbol variation. In the case of Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has the latter half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub-region a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more. Whether or not it is determined (since the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the latter half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is operating as a changing effect of the decorative symbol that is changing in the main area. do. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interrupt effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the replacement of the display of the decorative symbol between the main area and the sub area, and the next process {process of step 2344 (fifth). }. In addition, even if No in step 3242-6, step 3242-7, step 3242-8, step 3242-9 or step 3243-1, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2344 (fifth)}. In addition, in the change example 1 from the fifth embodiment, when the interrupt effect is executed and the display of the decorative symbol is exchanged between the main area and the sub area, the decorative symbol newly displayed in the main area is displayed. Even if the symbol variation related to the above is not a big hit, the display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after the execution of the interrupt effect. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. Even if the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area and the result of the symbol change of the second decorative symbol is lost as a result of executing the interrupt effect, the second decoration is displayed in the main area in the next symbol change. The symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. The third interrupt timing shown in FIG. 124 may be the symbol variation end timing = symbol variation stop timing, the timing immediately before the temporary stop of the symbol variation, or the timing immediately before the final stop of the symbol variation. May be. Further, if it is the last timing of the interrupt timings that exist in a plurality of times in one symbol change period, the symbol may be changed.

Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main area interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are step 3260 (fifth variation 1) and step 3262 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 It is determined whether or not the symbol variation of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub-region is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), in step 3262 (fifth variation 1), the advance notice effect display control means SM24 sets the latter half priority of the symbol variation of the decorative symbol that is changing in the sub-region to a predetermined value. (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3) (since the third interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing, the latter half priority is determined). If Yes in step 3262 (5th variation 1), the process proceeds to step 3256, and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2340).

With the above configuration, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, are displayed on the effect display device. By configuring the parallel lottery to be feasible, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is designated as the first decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side is designated as the second decorative symbol. It can be configured to display the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side at the same time. Further, of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol that first started the variable display in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and then the decorative symbol that started the variable display is displayed in the sub area. By configuring the above, the values of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be made equal, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. By frequently switching the display case, the player can pay attention to both the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above examples. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above examples are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First production symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and both the first production symbol and the second production symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain production period.
The first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before being definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. It is configured so that the special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the stop is displayed temporarily, can be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the special stop display mode is temporarily not stopped and displayed within the one effect period. be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1-2) is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
A first game content determining means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
The first identification information display control means that controls the first identification information display unit to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
A second game content determination means that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.
A second identification information display control means that controls the second identification information display unit to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for the effect display executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side, and while the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is variablely displayed. It is configured so that the first identification information is not variablely displayed while the second identification information is variablely displayed.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
A first effect symbol display control means for controlling the first effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means for controlling the second effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable both variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable both variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured to be able to execute both the stop display of
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured to be able to execute both the stop display of
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
The first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be provisionally stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain effect period, and is provisionally displayed. When it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that the special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, can be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The pachinko game characterized in that the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the certain effect period. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After displaying a plurality of types of the first effect symbols in a variable manner on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect display unit (for example, the effect display unit) displays one type or a combination of a plurality of types of the first effect symbols. The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the stop display by the effect display device SG), and
After displaying a plurality of types of second effect symbols in a variable manner on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect display unit (for example, the effect display unit (for example) displays one type or a combination of a plurality of types of second effect symbols. It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the stop display on the effect display device SG).
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and after the first production symbol is variablely displayed within a certain production period, the stop display is definitively displayed and within the certain production period. It is configured to definitively stop and display after the second production symbol is changed and displayed in.
The first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is configured to change and display again within the certain production period, and when the first production symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, at the time of the stop display, A special stop display mode indicating that the special game is not executed while the special game may be executed thereafter can be stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol which is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is composed and
Is it possible that the symbol for the second effect, which is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, is temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, or is the one effect? Even if the stop display is provisionally displayed before the stop display is definitively displayed within the period, the special stop display mode is used as the second effect symbol that is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. Even when the stop display cannot be performed and the second effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, the special stop display mode is not stopped and displayed as the second effect symbol which is a combination of the one type or a plurality of types. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First production symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and both the first production symbol and the second production symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain production period.
The first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before being definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first effect symbol is confirmed. It is configured so that the special stop display mode, which is not displayed when the stop is displayed temporarily, can be temporarily stopped and displayed.
The second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period is configured so that the special stop display mode is not temporarily stopped and displayed within the one effect period.
As the display state of the first effect symbol within a certain production period, the first display state in which the variable display of the first effect symbol is visible to the player and the variable display of the first effect symbol are displayed. Is hidden or the first effect symbol is more difficult to see for the player than the first display state. The symbol is configured so that it can be displayed at least in the case of the second display state.
If the special stop display mode is provisionally stopped and displayed as the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, it cannot be included when the first effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed. It is configured to be the first special stop display mode that includes the first effect symbol of the type, or the second special stop display mode that does not include the first effect symbol of the specific type.
When the first effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is provisionally compared to the case where the first special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the expected degree of execution of the special game after the end of the certain production period is higher when the pachinko machine is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. The random number temporary storage means (for example, the symbol holding means MJ32) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the holding to occur, and
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and the design for the production can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain production period.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stopped display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
After a certain hold occurs and before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the certain hold is regarded as a specific hold, and when the specific hold occurs. , If there is one or more pre-digestion holds that satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold is set. Within one effect period corresponding to the case where the effect is satisfied, the special stop display mode is definitively stopped and displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is definitively stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold is made. Within one effect period corresponding to the case where the information variation display start condition is satisfied, the special stop display mode is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect symbol only when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured to be.

Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the occurrence of hold.
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and the design for the production can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain production period.
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stopped display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
When the effect symbol is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, and the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as the effect symbol, at least one special effect symbol and special It is configured to be a combination with a plurality of normal production symbols, which are different types from the production symbols.
After a certain hold occurs and before the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the certain hold is regarded as a specific hold, and when the specific hold occurs. , If there is one or more pre-digestion holds that satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-digestion hold is set. When the special stop display mode is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to the case where it is satisfied, the plurality of normal effect symbols cannot be of the same type, while identification regarding the specific hold. When the special stop display mode is deterministically or provisionally stopped and displayed within one effect period corresponding to the case where the information variation display start condition is satisfied, the plurality of normal effect symbols may be of the same type. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being configured in this way.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
A variable member attached to a second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second starting port (for example, the second) The game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). With a variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d), which is configured to make it difficult to enter the ball as compared with the inability to enter the ball or the open state.
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
A first game content determining means (for example, a game content) that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the first random number and determines a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variable display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Determining means MN) and
Following the determination by the first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) changes and displays the first identification information, and then the first identification information is displayed. (I) The first identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling the stop display of the identification information, and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
A second game content determining means (for example, a game content) that executes a hit / fail judgment based on the second random number and determines a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variable display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. Determining means MN) and
Following the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) changes and displays the second identification information, and then the second identification information is displayed. (Ii) A second identification information display control means (for example, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls the stop display of the identification information, and
After the winning / failing judgment result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the winning / failing judgment result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A display control means (for example, decorative pattern display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is set as one effect period, and the effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner within a certain effect period. Has been
An effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped and displayed before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the one effect period, and is temporarily stopped and displayed. In that case, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed in a variable manner again within the certain production period, and when the production symbol is definitively or provisionally stopped and displayed, the deterministically or provisionally stopped. While the special game is not executed at the time of display, the special stop display mode indicating that the special game may be executed after the deterministic or provisionally stopped display is deterministic or provisional. It is configured to be stopped and displayed at
The special stop is within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start to stop display of the variation display of the first identification information and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the second identification information. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display mode is configured so that the ratio of deterministically or provisionally stopped display is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variable display start condition of the identification information is satisfied. A random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) that temporarily stores the acquired random numbers up to and controls the occurrence of hold.
When the condition for starting the variable display of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the random number related to the hold, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variable display of the identification information are displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines an aspect, and
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First production symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and both the first production symbol and the second production symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain production period.
If a predetermined number of holds exist at any timing within a certain production period, the first production symbol that is variablely displayed within the certain production period will be displayed within the certain production period. It is performed when the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding any of the predetermined number of holds is satisfied after the variable display is continuously performed even after the end within the certain production period without being definitively stopped and displayed. Within one production period, the continuously variable display of the first production symbol is definitively stopped and displayed.
Even if a predetermined number of holds exist at any timing within a certain production period, the second production symbol that is variablely displayed within the certain production period is within the one production period. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be definitively stopped and displayed at.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
Starting ports (for example, first main game starting port A10, second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter, and
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
Identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is provided with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start port (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10). , 2nd main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
A game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that executes a hit / fail determination based on the random number and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variable display mode of the identification information based on the result of the hit / fail determination.
According to the determination by the game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the identification information is variablely displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g and the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop and display the identification information after the operation, and
After the result of the winning / failing determination is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning openings (for example, the first major winning opening C10 and the second major winning opening C20) can be placed in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game, and
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side. With MT)
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the first effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). First production symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) is provided.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the identification information is set as one production period, and both the first production symbol and the second production symbol can be variablely displayed within a certain production period.
When the first effect symbol has a plurality of types and the result of the winning / failing determination is won and the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the first effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is not won, the combination of the first effect symbols that are not the same type is stopped and displayed.
When the second effect symbol has a plurality of types and the result of the winning / failing determination is won and the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed, the combination of the second effect symbols of the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the second effect symbol is stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is not won, the combination of the second effect symbols that are not the same type is stopped and displayed.
The combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the hit / fail judgment is non-winning, rather than the total number of combinations of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is non-winning. It is configured so that the total number is smaller,
It has a plurality of types of effect display modes as an effect display mode that depends on controlling the effect display contents to be displayed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).
When displaying a certain first effect symbol among the plurality of types of first effect symbols, the display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in the certain type of effect display mode and the certain type The display attribute related to the certain first effect symbol in the effect display mode different from the effect display mode of
When displaying a certain second effect symbol among the plurality of types of second effect symbols, the display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in the certain type of effect display mode and the certain type It is configured so that the display attribute related to the certain second effect symbol in the effect display mode of a different type from that of the effect display mode is different.
The result of the winning / failing determination is non-winning rather than the probability that the certain first effecting symbol is included in the combination of the first effecting symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the winning / failing determination is non-winning. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the combination of the second effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the case is configured so that the probability that the certain second effect symbol is included is higher.

(Sixth Embodiment)
Here, although some of the above-described embodiments have been described, an example of a configuration further applicable to the above-described embodiment will be referred to as a sixth embodiment, which will be described in detail below. For example, in addition to the configuration including the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol described in the first embodiment, and the image display configuration overlapping with the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol of the fourth embodiment. It is possible to appropriately provide one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment. Further, the configuration of the image display overlapping with the hold display of the fourth embodiment may be changed to one or more configurations described in the sixth embodiment, or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate. As a supplement, the combination is not limited to the above-exemplified combination, and any of the configurations described in the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be appropriately applied to one or a plurality of configurations described in the sixth embodiment. It may be changed or one or a plurality of configurations may be added as appropriate, and may be combined with a configuration of an image display that overlaps with the advance notice effect of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 82.

<< Meaning of terms >>
The meaning of each term in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail below. It should be added that the configurations and effects related to the following terms can be applied to other embodiments and can be combined with other configurations.

<Decorative design>
The decorative symbol is an image controlled by the sub-control board S that suggests or informs the result of the winning / failing lottery on the main game side. After the decorative design starts to fluctuate, it temporarily stops, and then it stops fixedly. In addition, the result of the winning / failing lottery on the main game side can be suggested or notified by the stop display mode (stop symbol) when the fixed stop is made.
<Effect of decorative design>
(1) The decorative design makes it easier for the player to recognize that the player is changing, waiting for the change, the result of the winning / losing lottery, and the like.

<1st decorative design>
The first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed so that the player can easily see it.
<Effect of the first decorative pattern>
(1) The first decorative pattern can improve the interest of the changing production.
(2) The first decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by displaying a fixed stop display.

<Second decorative pattern>
The second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol indicating that it is changing at all times, when it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or when the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol.
<Effect of the second decorative pattern>
(1) When always displaying: The second decorative symbol can notify the result of the game by displaying a fixed stop display.
(2) When the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or cannot be seen 1: When the first decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop, the second decorative symbol may also be displayed as a fixed stop, but the second decorative symbol is displayed as a fixed stop. It is preferable to display (temporarily stop) only when it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol or when the first decorative symbol cannot be visually recognized. In this case, the result of the game is notified by this temporary stop display. Can be done. ..
(3) When the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or cannot be seen 2: When the second decorative symbol is only variable display without performing the temporary stop display and the fixed stop display, and the first decorative symbol is difficult to see or cannot be seen. Even if it is, it can be clearly notified that it is changing.

<Main area>
The main area is a display area for displaying the first decorative pattern. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped in the main area.
<Effect of main area>
(1) The first decorative pattern can be displayed.
(2) It is possible to display a variable display rich in color rendering.

<Sub area>
The sub area is a display area for displaying the second decorative pattern. The second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner or stopped in the sub area.
<Effect of sub-area>
(1) The second decorative pattern can be displayed.

<Waiting for fluctuation>
The change waiting state is a state in which the main game symbol and the decorative symbol have not changed. During the fluctuation stop, it may be called the fluctuation stop state.
<Effect of waiting for fluctuation>
(1) While waiting for fluctuation, it is possible to notify that the game is not in progress.

<Waiting movie>
The waiting movie is a display of a moving image indicating to the player that the movie is not changing.
<Effect of waiting movie>
(1) By displaying the waiting movie, it can be suggested that the table is vacant and the game is possible.

<Hold display>
The hold display is an image showing the number of fluctuations that are controlled by the sub-control board S and are not executed on the main game side.
<Effect of hold display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the unvariable number.

<1st hold display>
The first hold display is a hold display that is displayed so that the player can easily see it.
<Effect of 1st hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.
(2) By changing the display mode of the first hold display, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning.

<Second hold display>
The second hold display is a hold display that is visibly displayed by the player at all times, when it is difficult for the player to see the first hold display, or when the player cannot see the first hold display.
<Effect of 2nd hold display>
(1) The player can recognize the unchanged number.

<1st hold display area>
The first hold display area is an area for displaying the first hold display. In some cases, a display indicating the upper limit of the first hold display may be performed.
<Effect of the first hold display area>
(1) The first hold display can be displayed.
(2) A display indicating the upper limit of the first hold display can be performed.

<Second hold display area>
The second hold display area is an area for displaying the second hold display.
<Effect of the second hold display area>
(1) The second hold display can be displayed.

<Shift display (shift animation)>
The shift display (shift animation) is a display of a moving image when moving the first hold display displayed when the number of holds decreases.
<Effect of shift display (shift animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has decreased.

<Holding occurrence display (holding occurrence animation)>
The hold occurrence display (hold occurrence occurrence animation) is a display of a moving image when displaying a new first hold occurrence display when the number of holds increases.
<Effect of occurrence display (holding occurrence animation)>
(1) It is possible to easily recognize that the number of reservations has increased.

<Holding display for directing the fluctuation (holding digestion transmission image, fluctuation-compatible image)>
The hold display for the effect of the fluctuation is also referred to as a hold digestion transmission image or a change correspondence image, and is an image displayed when a certain hold is digested.
<Effect of hold display for production of the fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of hit expectation regarding the fluctuation that is currently fluctuating.

<Holding display area for directing the fluctuation>
The holding display area for the effect of the fluctuation is an area for displaying an image to be displayed when a certain hold is digested.
<Effect of the hold display area for the effect of the fluctuation>
(1) It is possible to display the hold display for the effect of the change.
(2) It can be suggested that the hold display for the effect of the change is displayed.

<Display priority>
The display priority indicates the priority of the image and the moving image to be displayed on the effect display device (the order of displaying from the front side of the effect display device).
<Effect of display priority>
(1) When a plurality of images or moving images are displayed in duplicate, it can be configured so that the player can easily see the images or moving images.

<Volume adjustment screen display>
The volume adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the volume can be adjusted and displays an image showing the currently set volume, the volume adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of volume adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the volume can be adjusted.
(2) The volume can be easily adjusted by the player.

<Light intensity adjustment screen display>
The light amount adjustment screen display is a screen display that indicates that the light amount can be adjusted and displays an image showing the currently set light amount, the light amount adjustment method, and the like.
<Effect of light intensity adjustment screen display>
(1) It is possible to notify that the amount of light can be adjusted.
(2) The amount of light can be easily adjusted by the player.

<Stage (directing stage)>
The stage (effect stage) is also referred to as a mode (effect mode), and is an effect mode shown by a background image.
<Effect of stage (directing stage)>
(1) Display corresponding to the stage (first decorative design, notice, etc.) can be displayed.

<Hidden mode (hidden stage)>
The latent mode (latent stage) is an effect stage (effect mode) in which it is unknown whether the player is in the probability-variable gaming state or the non-probability-variable gaming state.
<Effect of latent mode>
(1) Probability fluctuation It is possible to incite whether or not the game is in a gaming state.

<Tempai>
Tempai is also called reach or reach state, and among a plurality of symbol rows, the symbol rows other than the symbol row scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end have the same decorative symbol, and are scheduled to be stopped (temporarily stopped) at the end. The symbol sequence of is fluctuating.
<Effect of Tenpai>
(1) It can be shown that it is a hit when the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol stopped in another symbol row is stopped in one more symbol row.

<Reach production>
The reach effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the fluctuation, and is an effect that occurs mainly after the tempai. Reach production includes normal reach (normal reach production), super reach (super reach production, SP reach, SP reach production, first half of super reach, second half of super reach) and the like. Mainly, the period from the time when the reach is established to the time when it develops into super reach (or, if it does not become super reach, the period from after the reach is established until all the symbol rows are stopped (temporarily stopped)) is called normal reach, and it develops after the reach is established. The production is called super reach (also called post-reach development production).
<Effect of reach production>
(1) It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting the fluctuation.

<Notice (notice display, production)>
The notice (notice display, effect) is mainly to suggest the hit expectation of the fluctuation, but it is used as a suggestion that there is a hit in the hold (example: look-ahead notice, look-ahead effect, etc.). There is also.
<Effect of notice (notice display, production)>
(1) It is possible to instigate whether or not the fluctuation is a hit.
(2) It is possible to instigate whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
Temporary stop (temporary stop display) means that the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate and appears to have stopped once, but in reality, the decorative symbol is slightly moving (also called shaking fluctuation). There is) state.
<Effect of temporary stop (temporary stop display)>
(1) It can be made to appear that the fluctuation is executed a plurality of times.
(2) Whether or not to make a definite stop (in other words, whether it re-varies without a definite stop, or whether it is a hit without a definite stop, etc.) can be fueled.

<Pseudo-ren>
Pseudo-ren is sometimes referred to as re-variation in a broad sense, and is an effect that makes it appear that the decorative pattern is changed a plurality of times in one change.
<Effect of pseudo-ren>
(1) It is possible to make it appear that the decorative pattern is changed a plurality of times within one change.

<Pseudo-ream suggestion pattern>
The pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when inciting whether or not a pseudo-ream occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-ream suggestion symbol>
(1) It is possible to incite whether or not a pseudo-ream occurs.

<Pseudo-ream (re-variation) design>
The pseudo-ream (re-variation) symbol is one of the special decorative symbols indicating that the pseudo-ream (re-variation) occurs.
<Effect of pseudo-ream (re-variation) symbol>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a pseudo-ream (re-variation) will occur.

<Development pattern>
The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the reach effect is generated. <Effect of development pattern>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that a reach effect will occur.

<Look-ahead production>
The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that there is a hit in the hold. The look-ahead effect is executed on condition that the trigger hold has occurred (when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect for the caused hold).
<Effect of look-ahead effect>
(1) It is possible to instigate whether or not there is a hit in the hold.

<Trigger hold>
The trigger hold is a hold that triggered the execution of the look-ahead effect (it was decided to execute the look-ahead effect for the hold that occurred).
<Effect of trigger hold>
(1) It becomes possible to execute a look-ahead effect.
(2) It is possible to suggest the possibility of winning due to fluctuations in trigger hold.

<Right-handed instruction display>
The right-handed instruction display is based on the premise that the second main game start opening or the big winning opening is provided on the right side of the board, but it is mainly displayed in the time-saving game state that right-handed strike should be executed. It is a display.
<Effect of right-handed instruction display>
(1) It is possible to urge the player to perform a right-handed hit in the time-saving game state.

<How to hit warning display (left hit warning display, right hit warning display)>
The striking method warning display is a display indicating the recommended striking method when the striking method is different from the recommended striking method in the current gaming state.
(1) It is possible to urge the player to execute a striking method corresponding to the game state.

<Default display>
The default display is a display mode that is predetermined as an initial state.
<Effect of default display>
(1) It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the display is in the initial state.

<Effect display>
The effect display is a special effect displayed on the effect display device for the image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the accessory, and the like.
<Effect of effect display>
(1) It is possible to emphasize the target image itself, the movement of the character in the moving image, the movement of the accessory, and the like.

<Full rotation production>
The full rotation effect is a state in which the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol is scrolling at a low speed while the symbols are aligned.
<Effect of full rotation effect>
(1) It is possible to definitively notify that the fluctuation is a hit.

<Promotion production>
The promotion effect is an effect that encourages whether or not the non-probable variation symbol is changed to the probabilistic variation symbol, or whether or not it is changed from a low round (for example, per 4R) to a high round (for example, per 16R). It is a production. The promotion effect can occur not only during fluctuations but also during jackpots. The promotion effect that incites whether or not the non-probable variation symbol is changed to the probabilistic variation symbol is sometimes called the probabilistic promotion effect, and the promotion effect that incites whether or not it is changed from the low round hit to the high round hit is sometimes called the round promotion effect.
<Effect of promotion effect>
(1) It is possible to instigate whether or not the non-probable variation symbol is changed to the probabilistic variation symbol.
(2) It is possible to instigate whether or not the change is made from a low round hit to a high round hit.

<Reach Voice>
The reach voice is a notice that suggests a hit expectation or the like by a sound generated when the reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established.
<Effect of reach voice>
(1) When it reaches the reach, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting in combination with the image display and the movement of the accessory.

FIG. 126 shows the display screen and the display priority displayed on the effect display device SG during the fluctuation standby. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates a display location when the object is displayed. First, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop (before the transition to the waiting movie described later), "437" is displayed as the first decorative symbol in a stopped state. , The second decorative symbol is also displayed in the state of being stopped at "437", the second hold display on the first main game side is displayed as "0", and the second hold display on the second main game side is "0". It is displayed and is displayed on hold for the effect of the change (displayed when the change starts, triggered by the deletion of the first hold display, and is displayed at the end or halfway of the change (). If the next change starts even after the display ends, the hold display for the effect of the change corresponding to the next change is displayed)), the first hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game side. The first hold display of is not displayed. The display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side are different, and the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side is different. The number indicating the number of holds is hollowed out, and the number indicating the number of holds is not hollowed out in the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd reserved display> 1st decorative symbol. The display priority may be 2nd reserved display> 2nd decorative symbol> 1st decorative symbol, and since the 2nd decorative symbol and the 2nd reserved display do not overlap with each other, the second decoration Design = 2nd hold display> 1st decorative design.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently, there is neither a hold on the first main game side nor a hold on the second main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop, and the game is in a non-time shortened gaming state. The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side, which were displayed on the variable standby screen display 1, are not displayed. In addition, similarly to the change standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state, the hold display for the effect of the change, the first hold display on the first main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Not. Here, a waiting movie indicating that the fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) is in progress is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the fluctuation stop, and a part of the reach effect is used for the standby movie. ing.

In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state or the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, the holding display area for the effect of the fluctuation (the place where the holding for the effect of the variation is displayed is displayed. Although the configuration in which the display) and the first hold display area (display for indicating the place where the hold is displayed) on the first main game side are hidden has been described, the configuration may be such that these are displayed. For example, each display area may be divided and displayed as a hold display area for producing the fluctuation and a first hold display area on the first main game side. Thereby, it can be suggested that the display showing the upper limit number of the first hold display and the hold display for effect of the change are displayed even during the change standby (variation stop). Further, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time shortened game state, the second decorative symbol and the second hold display (first) are the same as the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state (at the same position). The main game side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanged number in the first hold display, but can recognize that the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are not changing in addition to the waiting movie, and the second hold. The display can be configured so that the unvariable number can be recognized.

Next, the variable standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. Currently, there is no hold on the 1st main game side and no hold on the 2nd main game side, the fluctuation is stopped, and before a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) elapses from the fluctuation stop (before the transition to the waiting movie). The first decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state at "437", the second decorative symbol is also displayed in a stopped state at "437", and the second hold display on the first main game side is "0". Display, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and "→→ right-handed →→" is displayed as the right-handed instruction display. The first hold display on the side and the first hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. It should be noted that the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side are different from the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side, as in the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state. In the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side, the number indicating the number of holds is omitted, and in the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side, the number indicating the number of holds is It is not hollowed out. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> first decorative symbol. The display priority may be right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol> first decorative symbol, and the right-handed instruction display may be the second decorative symbol and the second hold display. Since it does not overlap, right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol = second hold display> first decorative symbol may be used.

Next, the variable standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. Currently, the fluctuation is stopped, and after a predetermined period (for example, 242 seconds) has elapsed from the fluctuation stop, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol displayed on the variable standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state are displayed. , The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed. In addition, similarly to the change standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened game state, the hold display for the effect of the change, the first hold display on the first main game side, and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Not. Further, similarly to the variable standby screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state, a waiting movie indicating that the variable standby (variable stop) is in progress is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the variable stop. The waiting movie is the same as the waiting movie displayed on the variable waiting screen display 2 in the non-time shortened gaming state.

In addition, in the variable waiting screen display 1 in the time-reduced gaming state or the variable waiting screen display 2 in the time-reduced gaming state, the effect holding display area of the variation (to indicate the place where the effect holding of the variation is displayed). Although the configuration in which the display) and the first hold display area (display for indicating the place where the hold is displayed) on the second main game side are hidden has been described, the configuration may be such that these are displayed. For example, each display area may be divided and displayed as a hold display area for producing the fluctuation and a first hold display area on the second main game side. As a result, it is suggested that the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation is displayed even during the time reduction game, and the number of the first hold display on the second main game side can be easily recognized. Further, in the variable standby screen display 2 in the time-reduced game state, the second decorative symbol and the second hold display (first main game) are the same as the variable standby screen display 1 in the time-reduced game state (at the same position). The side, the second main game side) may be displayed, and the first decorative symbol and the first hold display may not be displayed. As a result, the player cannot recognize the unchanging number in the first hold display, but in addition to the waiting movie, it can recognize that the second decorative symbol is not changing, and the second hold display does not change. It can be configured so that the number can be recognized.

In addition to the screen display configuration described above, various screen display configurations can be used. For example, the variable standby screen display 1 in the non-time shortened gaming state and the variable waiting screen display in the time shortened gaming state. In 1, the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are not displayed, or in the non-time reduction game state, the hold and the second main game on the first main game side are not displayed. If there is no hold on the side and a predetermined period has passed, the transition from the variable waiting screen display 1 to the variable waiting screen display 2 can be performed, but in the time reduction game state, the variable waiting screen display 1 is displayed. , The first main game side is not held and the second main game side is not held, and even if a predetermined period has passed, the variable waiting screen display 1 is configured so as not to shift to the variable waiting screen display 2. May be good.

Next, the volume adjustment screen display and the light amount adjustment screen display will be described with reference to FIG. 127. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates a display location when the object is displayed. First, the volume adjustment in the non-time reduction game state will be described. In the non-time reduction game state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) or fluctuation. The volume is adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2. While the volume adjustment screen (display showing the volume, displaying the cross button indicating the volume adjustment method, displaying the sub input button indicating ending the volume adjustment screen, displaying the image that makes the screen semi-transparent) is displayed. When the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, the display of the volume adjustment screen ends. The first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed during the variable standby (variation stop) in the non-time reduction game state. The volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If it is changing in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the volume adjustment screen smaller during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) than during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). For example, the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) is simply reduced (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method, sub-input indicating that the volume adjustment screen is terminated). The display of the button SB and the display of the image that makes the screen semi-transparent are reduced), only the display indicating the volume is displayed, or the display indicating the volume and the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method are displayed. It may be only a combination of the two. If only the display indicating the volume or the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. The volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd hold display> volume adjustment screen> 1st decorative symbol> 1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Even if the display priority is 2nd decorative symbol = 2nd hold display, 2nd decorative symbol <2nd hold display, 1st decorative symbol <1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). good. If a button operation related to volume adjustment (operation of the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the volume adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the volume adjustment in the time-saving game state will be described. In the time reduction game state, the volume can be adjusted during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) or fluctuation. If the time is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and right-handed An instruction display may be displayed, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the volume adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap some of the displays. For example, the volume adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired. If the time is changing in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the change. If there is a hold, the first hold display on the second main game side and the right-handed instruction display are displayed, and although not shown, the volume adjustment screen is displayed smaller than during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) during fluctuations. For example, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap. For example, the volume adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) is simply reduced (display indicating the volume, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method, and sub-input button indicating the end of the volume adjustment screen. The SB display and the image display that makes the screen semi-transparent are reduced), only the volume display is displayed, or the volume display and the cross-shaped button SB-2 display that indicates the volume adjustment method are displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. If only the display indicating the volume or the combination of the display indicating the volume and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the volume adjustment method is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the volume adjustment screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap. Further, the volume adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the volume adjustment screen can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the second decorative symbol. The volume adjustment screen may not be displayed during the fluctuation, and the volume adjustment screen may be displayed when the up and down buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> volume adjustment screen> first decorative symbol> first hold display (and hold display for producing the variation). The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative symbol> right-handed instruction display. , Further, the second decorative symbol = the second hold display, the first decorative symbol <the first hold display (and the hold display for the effect of the variation) may be used.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. In the non-time reduction game state, the amount of light can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). The amount of light is adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2. During the display of the light amount adjustment screen (display showing the amount of light, displaying a cross button indicating the amount of light adjusting method, displaying a sub-input button indicating ending the light amount adjustment screen, displaying an image that makes the screen semi-transparent). When the operation of the sub input button SB is performed, the display of the light intensity adjustment screen ends. If the non-time shortened game state is in variable standby (variable stop), the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. The light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. If it is changing in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and although not shown, it is preferable to display the light amount adjustment screen smaller than during the change standby (variation stop) during fluctuations. For example, a simply reduced version of the light amount adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (variation stop) (display indicating the light amount, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light amount adjustment method, sub-input indicating that the light amount adjustment screen is terminated). The display of the button SB and the display of the image that makes the screen translucent may be reduced), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light may be displayed. It may be only a combination of the two. When only the display indicating the amount of light or the combination of the display indicating the amount of light and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjusting screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the light amount adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If it is changing in the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold for directing the change. If there is a display or hold, the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the light amount may be adjusted so that the light amount can be adjusted even during the fluctuation, and when the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed during the fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light amount is adjusted. It may be configured to display the adjustment screen. The display priority is 2nd decorative symbol> 2nd hold display> light intensity adjustment screen> 1st decorative symbol> 1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). Even if the display priority is 2nd decorative symbol = 2nd hold display, 2nd decorative symbol <2nd hold display, 1st decorative symbol <1st hold display (and hold display for effect of the variation). good. If a button operation related to light intensity adjustment (operation of the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2) is performed while the standby movie is being displayed, the display of the standby movie is terminated and the light intensity adjustment screen is displayed.

Next, the light amount adjustment in the time-saving game state will be described. In the time reduction game state, the amount of light can be adjusted during the fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop). If the time is in the variable standby (variable stop) state in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and right-handed An instruction display may be displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap all of these, or the light amount adjustment screen may be displayed so as not to overlap with some of the displays. For example, the light amount adjustment screen overlaps with the first decorative symbol, but may be configured so as not to overlap with the second decorative symbol. For example, a simply reduced version of the light intensity adjustment screen during fluctuation standby (fluctuation stop) (display indicating the light intensity, display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the light intensity adjustment method, sub-input button indicating that the light intensity adjustment screen is terminated). The SB display and the image display that makes the screen translucent may be reduced), or only the display indicating the amount of light may be displayed, or the display indicating the amount of light and the display of the cross button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light may be displayed. Only a combination of the two may be used. When only the display indicating the amount of light or the combination of the display indicating the amount of light and the display of the cross-shaped button SB-2 indicating the method of adjusting the amount of light is used, the display mode may be the same as that during the fluctuation standby (variation stop). , May be different (for example, the shapes may be different, or even if the shapes are the same, they may be reduced). Further, the light amount adjusting screen and the second decorative symbol may be configured so as not to overlap with each other. Further, the light amount adjustment screen displayed small may not overlap with the changing second decorative symbol, but may be configured to overlap with the changing first decorative symbol. As a result, the light amount adjustment screens can be duplicated, except for the display for which visibility is particularly desired to be ensured. If the time is changing in the game state, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, the second hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for directing the change. If there is a hold, the first hold display and the right-handed instruction display on the second main game side are displayed, and the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed. It should be noted that the light amount may be adjusted so that the light amount can be adjusted even during the fluctuation, and when the light amount adjustment screen is not displayed during the fluctuation and the left and right buttons of the cross button SB-2 are operated, the light amount is adjusted. It may be configured to display the adjustment screen. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second decorative symbol> second hold display> light intensity adjustment screen> first decorative symbol> first hold display (and hold display for producing the variation). The display priority is right-handed instruction display> second hold display> second decorative symbol, second decorative symbol> second hold display> right-handed instruction display, second hold display> second decorative symbol> right-handed instruction display. , Further, the second decorative symbol = the second hold display, the first decorative symbol <the first hold display (and the hold display for the effect of the variation) may be used.

Next, the screen display during normal fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 128. The broken line in the figure indicates a situation in which the object is not actually displayed, and indicates a display location when the object is displayed. First, the screen display during normal fluctuation in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Hold display "0", hold display for directing the fluctuation, first hold display (2 pieces) on the first main game side are displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed. No. In the normal fluctuation screen display in the non-time reduction game state, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed when the ball enters the second main game start port B10, and the second on the second main game side. When the hold display is counted up (added) and the variable ball related to the hold on the second main game side is started, the first hold display on the second main game side is decremented by one, and the second hold on the second main game side is started. The display is configured to count down (subtract). Specifically, at present, there are two holds on the first main game side, two first hold displays on the first main game side, and "2" on the second hold display on the first main game side. The first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed, the second hold display on the second main game side is displayed as "0", and a new ball enters the second main game start port B10. If there is, one first hold display on the second main game side is displayed, and the second hold display on the second main game side is updated and displayed from "0" to "1". The display priority is sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> hold display for the effect of the change> The first hold display on the first main game side> the first hold display on the second main game side. The display priority may be sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second hold display, sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second hold display, and the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side <second main game The first hold display on the side, the first hold display on the first main game side = the first hold display on the second main game side may be used.

Next, the screen display during the normal fluctuation in the time-reduced gaming state will be described. Currently changing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area, the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "0" on the first main game side, and the second on the second main game side. 2 Hold display "2", hold display for directing the fluctuation, first hold display (2 pieces) on the second main game side, right-handed instruction display, and first hold on the first main game side are displayed. The display is not displayed. In the normal fluctuation screen display in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed even when the ball enters the first main game start port A10, but the first main game side The second hold display is configured to be counted up. The display priority is right-handed instruction display> sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> main area (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol)> Hold display for production> 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side. The display priority may be sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) <second hold display, sub-area (variable display of the second decorative symbol) = second hold display, and the main area. The display priority of (variable display of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol) may be set to the lowest of these, and the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed. , 1st hold display on the 1st main game side> 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side, or 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side, or 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side Display> The first hold display on the first main game side may be used.

Here, the characteristic configuration shown with reference to FIG. 128 will be supplemented.

In the non-time reduction game state (state without electric support state), the hold display on the first main game side is displayed as the first hold display in the display mode of "●". On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state (state accompanied by the electric support state), the hold display on the second main game side is displayed as the first hold display in the display mode of "heart (filled)". Further, the second hold display is the same regardless of whether it is in the non-time shortened game state or the time shortened game state, but the second hold display on the first main game side is a "blank number". It is a display mode, and the second hold display on the second main game side is a display mode of "filled numbers". It should be noted that the difference between the display mode of the second hold display on the first main game side and the display mode of the second hold display on the second main game side is shown not only by hollowing out or filling, but also by different colors of numbers. It may be configured.

When the configuration of the starting port (see the fifth embodiment) is such that the ball enters the first main game starting port A10 and the second main game starting port B10 alternately (see the fifth embodiment), the first hold on the first main game side is made. The display mode of the display and the display mode of the first hold display on the second main game side may be the same. It may be configured to display the first hold display on the second main game side. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 has entered the ball.

In the main area, the first decorative symbol is a scroll display that moves from top to bottom using the entire effect display device SG in the left column, middle column, and right column (specifically, 1 → 2 → ... The first decorative symbol displayed in the main area is sequentially switched and displayed while scrolling in the order of → 7 → 8 → ・ ・ ・ 1 → ・ ・ ・, and temporarily stopped → fixed stop in the order of left and right. ) Is performed, but in the sub-area, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column as if it fluctuates on the spot at the lower right of the effect display device SG (that is, the effect). A variable display that makes it appear as if it is moving from top to bottom only in a part of the display area, instead of being displayed by moving from top to bottom using the entire display device SG).

Further, as shown in FIG. 128, in the non-time reduction game state, the effect hold display for the effect and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time reduction game state, the effect display device SG is displayed. It is configured to display the effect hold display for the effect and the first hold display on the second main game side at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and the player is currently mainly playing the game by either start port. (In the non-time shortened game state, the first main game start port A10 is the main, and in the time shortened game state, the second main game start port B10 is the main). "Or" heart (fill) "), or the display position of the first hold display on the first main game side or the first hold display on the second main game side (in the non-time reduction game state, the first on the first main game side) 1 The hold display is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG, and in the time-reduced game state, the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed at the lower left of the effect display device SG). ing. The display mode and display position of the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are the same regardless of whether the game is in the non-time reduction game state or the time reduction game state. Is.

Here, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the second on the first main game side that can be displayed during the fluctuations in the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. The display patterns of the hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side will be described in detail below, including a modified example.
(1) 1st hold display (1-1) In the non-time reduction game state, only the 1st hold display on the 1st main game side is displayed (the 1st hold display on the 2nd main game side is not displayed), and the time is shortened. In the gaming state, only the first hold display on the second main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-2) In the non-time reduction game state, the first hold display on the first main game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed, and in the time reduction game state, the second main game side second display. Only 1 hold display is displayed (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed).
(1-3) In the non-time reduction game state, only the first hold display on the first main game side is displayed (the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed), and in the time reduction game state, the first main player is displayed. The first hold display on the game side and the first hold display on the second main game side are displayed.
(2) Second hold display The second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed in both the non-time reduction game state and the time reduction game state. ..

The area where the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation are displayed is collectively referred to as the first hold display area, and the area on the first main game side is set as the first hold display area. The area where the second hold display and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed may be collectively referred to as the second hold display area. As a supplement, unlike the first hold display area, the second hold display area does not perform the display corresponding to the change display of the change, such as the hold display for the effect of the change. That is, the second hold display for indicating that the change is in progress is not additionally displayed, and only the number of holds (the number that has not changed) is displayed until it gets tired.

The effect-holding display of the variation has the same display mode regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side. Specifically, in the non-time shortened gaming state, the fluctuation on the first main game side or the fluctuation on the second main game side is larger than the first hold display on the first main game side. If it is displayed as "●" and the time is shortened, the change on the first main game side or the change on the second main game side is displayed from the first hold display on the second main game side. It is displayed as a large "heart (fill)". It should be noted that the effect hold display of the change can be displayed only in the change of the first main game side (when the change start condition of the first main game side is satisfied) in the non-time shortened gaming state {that is, It is configured so that it is not displayed when the fluctuation of the second main game side (when the fluctuation start condition of the second main game side is satisfied)}, and if the time is shortened, the fluctuation of the second main game side (second main game side). It is configured so that it can be displayed only when the fluctuation start condition on the game side is satisfied (that is, it is not displayed when the fluctuation on the first main game side is satisfied (that is, when the fluctuation start condition on the first main game side is satisfied)). May be good. In addition, as an effect according to the degree of expectation of the change, the display mode of the hold display for the effect of the change may be changed, for example, the color changes (default color (here, filled black) → red, Etc.) or the shape may change (default shape (here, "circle" for the first main game side, "heart" for the second main game side) → ☆, etc.), and the number of patterns in the display mode In the non-time reduction game state, the number of patterns in the fluctuation on the first main game side (for example, a total of 6 patterns of default colors, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors) is provided. The default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) includes the number of patterns in the variation on the second main game side (for example, a total of three patterns of the default color, red, and rainbow color). The degree of expectation is higher than the default color <red <rainbow color.), And in the time-saving game state, the number of patterns in the fluctuation of the second main game side (for example, the default color, blue, yellow, It has a total of 6 patterns of green, red, and rainbow colors. As for the hit expectation, the default color <blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color) is the number of patterns in the fluctuation of the first main game side (the number of patterns (the number of patterns on the first main game side). For example, it has a pattern of a total of three colors of default color, red, and rainbow color. The hit expectation is higher than the default color <red <rainbow color.). It should be noted that the same relationship of the number of patterns may be adopted for the undigested hold (first hold display).

The display priority of the 1st hold display and the 2nd hold display is 2nd hold display> 1st hold display, and if both hold displays are displayed even during non-normal fluctuations, The display priority of the second hold display is set higher than the display priority of the first hold display. For example, when a notice image (displayed on the entire screen such as the next notice), SP reach, first decorative symbol, etc. is displayed, the second hold display> notice image (or SP reach, first decorative symbol, etc.) > The first hold display is displayed.

Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be duplicated, and whether or not the first reserved display and the second reserved display can be duplicated are as follows, including examples of changes (FIG. 126, FIG. 128, etc., if necessary). See).
(1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be duplicated (1-1) The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) (due to the display priority, the overlapping portion is , The second decorative symbol is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol), and the stop display positions of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are defined (not shown).
(1-2) The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol do not overlap during the fluctuation standby (variation stop), and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol overlap during the fluctuation (due to the display priority). In the portion, the stop display position of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is determined so that the second decorative symbol is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol).
For example, in the non-time reduction game state, the configuration may be (1-1), in the time reduction game state, the configuration may be (1-2), and in the non-time reduction game state, the configuration may be (1-1). The configuration of 2) may be used, and the configuration of (1-1) may be used regardless of the time-saving game state.
(2) Whether or not the first hold display and the second hold display can be duplicated The first hold display (first hold display on the first main game side, second The first hold display and the second hold display so that the first hold display on the main game side) and the second hold display (second hold display on the first main game side and second hold display on the second main game side) do not overlap. The display position with the hold display is defined. It can be applied even during the fixed stop.

Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated, whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated, whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated, and whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated. The possibility of duplication is as follows.
(A) Non-time reduction game state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first hold display are displayed in both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display positions of the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display are determined so as to overlap (the first decorative symbol is displayed before the first reserved display in the overlapping portion due to the display priority).
(1) ′ Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first hold display overlap both during the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and during the fluctuation (depending on the display priority). In the overlapping portion, the display positions of the first decorative symbol and the first reserved display are determined so that the first reserved display is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol).
(2) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used so that the second decorative symbol and the second hold display do not overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the second hold display overlap both during the change standby (variation stop) and during the change (duplicate portion due to the display priority). Is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol), the display positions of the first decorative symbol and the second reserved display are determined.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used so that the second decorative symbol and the first hold display do not overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is defined. In the non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol and the first hold display are defined to overlap at least during the fluctuation, and in the same non-time reduction game state, the first decorative symbol and the second hold display are It is set to overlap at least during fluctuations, and may be set to overlap or not to overlap while waiting for a game.
(B) Time reduction game state (1) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first hold display overlap in both the variable standby (variation stop) and the variable. The display positions of the first decorative symbol and the first hold display are defined so as not to prevent them. In addition, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than the non-time reduction game state) during the fluctuation.
(2) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used so that the second decorative symbol and the second hold display do not overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is defined.
(3) Whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second hold display can be duplicated The first decorative symbol and the first decorative symbol are used so that the first decorative symbol and the second hold display do not overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the second hold display is defined. In addition, it may be configured to overlap rarely (less frequently than the non-time reduction game state) during the fluctuation.
(4) Whether or not the second decorative symbol and the first hold display can be duplicated The second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used so that the second decorative symbol and the first hold display do not overlap during both the fluctuation standby (variation stop) and the fluctuation. The display position of the first hold display is defined.

Next, the screen display during SP reach will be described with reference to FIG. 129. First, the screen display 1 during SP reach in the non-time reduction game state will be described. Currently in SP reach, the variation display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, the second hold display "0" on the second main game side, the variation The effect hold display is displayed, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed. Needless to say, when a game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4), and the second main game start port B10 When the game ball enters the ball, the second hold display on the second main game side is updated (however, up to hold 4). The first hold display can be displayed when returning to the normal stage screen (flat ground stage screen, etc.), which is a non-probability variable game state and a non-time reduction game state after the end of SP reach. At this time, the SP can be displayed. The first hold display will be displayed including the amount of the ball entered during the reach. Specifically, when the number of holds increases from 2 to 3 during SP reach, the first hold display is not displayed during SP reach, but when returning to the normal stage screen, three first hold displays are displayed. It is. The display priority is sub-area (variation display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> hold display for the effect of the change> SP reach effect.

Next, the screen display 2 during SP reach in the non-time reduction gaming state will be described. Currently, SP reach is in progress, the character YK has moved to the front of the effect display device SG, the variation display of the second decorative symbol in the sub area, the second hold display "2" on the first main game side, The second hold display "0" on the second main game side and the hold display for the effect of the change are displayed, and the change display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are displayed. It has not been. It should be noted that the hold display for the effect of the change may be configured not to be displayed.

In this way, under specific circumstances {during SP reach, while the character is operating, promotion effect (effect that encourages whether or not to promote from an even number symbol that is a non-probability variation symbol to an odd number symbol that is a probabilistic variation symbol), error screen display, etc. }, By configuring the configuration so that the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the first hold display on the first main game side are not displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the SP reach. Even during SP reach, a variable display of the first decorative symbol in the main area or a first hold display on the first main game side may be displayed. In this case, the first decoration in the main area may be displayed. It is preferable that the variable display of the symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner of the effect display device SG (almost the same size as the variable display of the second decorative symbol or slightly larger in the variable display of the first decorative symbol), and the main area. By displaying the variable display of the first decorative symbol in, it is possible to show the player the reach mode (for example, "4 ↓ 4") and the reach symbol (for example, only one "4" is displayed). Become. The display priority is sub-area (variation display of the second decorative symbol)> second hold display> hold display for the effect of the change> liquid crystal display {effect display (in Fig. 129, the star-shaped accessory YK has fallen. Occasionally, it is an effect on the effect display device SG that makes it appear to shine upwards with reference to the fall position)}.

Next, the update of the first hold display and the second hold display will be described with reference to FIG. 130. First, the fluctuation is completed, and the fluctuation is stopped with two holds on the first main game side. Next, a new change on the first main game side has just started, the first hold display on the first main game side starts shifting the display position (shift animation starts), and the second on the first main game side. The hold display is subtracted from "2" to "1" immediately after the start of fluctuation. Next, before the shift of the first hold display on the first main game side is completed, the game ball is newly entered into the first main game start port A10, and the first ball is received in response to the new entry. A hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is performed in which the first hold display on the main game side is increased by one, and the second hold display on the first main game side is changed from "1" to "1" immediately after a new ball is entered. It is "2".

Here, the characteristic configuration shown with reference to FIG. 130 will be supplemented.

When a new hold occurs (when a game ball newly enters the start port), the execution time (for example, 1000 ms) of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) of the first hold display (from the lower part of the effect display device SG) It is an effect that the hold gradually appears and is displayed in a fixed position (the place where the Nth hold is displayed), and the time from the start of appearance to the completion of display is 1000 ms} is the update time of the second hold display (the update time of the second hold display). It is an addition time and a subtraction time, and is configured to be longer than, for example, 100 ms). Further, the execution time of the shift display (shift animation) of the first hold display (for example, 1500 ms) {the hold displayed at the place where the Nth hold is displayed is moved, and the N-1th hold is displayed. It is an effect that moves to the place where the hold is displayed, and then fits in the fixed position (the place where the N-1st hold is displayed) and displays it, and the time from the start of the move to the completion of the display (movement completion) is 1500 ms}. Is configured to be longer than the update time of the second hold display. Further, the update time of the second hold display is shorter than the variable fixed time (for example, the fixed variable time of the first main game symbol is 500 ms and the fixed variable time of the second main game symbol is 300 ms), and the shortest variation is further. It is configured to be shorter than the time (3000 ms in this embodiment).

Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the first hold display can display the shift display (shift animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) at the same time (overlapping) {that is, the first hold display is held. If the shift display (shift animation) starts to be executed during the execution of the occurrence display (hold occurrence animation), the pending occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) are displayed without interrupting the running hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation). When the shift display (shift animation) can be executed at the same time and the execution of the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation) is started during the execution of the shift display (shift animation), the shift display (shift animation) being executed is started. ) Can be executed at the same time without interrupting the shift display (shift animation) and the hold occurrence display (hold occurrence animation). } However, in the second hold display, it is impossible to display subtraction and addition at the same time, and after performing the subtraction display (due to the start of fluctuation), the addition is displayed (due to the entry into the starting port). It will be. When the number of holds increases immediately before the start of fluctuation and the start of fluctuation is reached, the second hold display is displayed by adding (due to the start of fluctuation) and then subtracting (due to the start of fluctuation). In both subtraction and addition, the time required for this update display (for example, updating from "2" to "1" or updating from "1" to "2") (because the number display is switched). The time required) is 100 ms.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the relationship between the look-ahead effect (holding change effect) and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) Blue hold change" will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with four holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the number of holds is four due to the new entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new entry is blue hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the blue hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”) and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation corresponding to the blue hold is started, and the blue hold is displayed as the effect hold display (blue) of the change. When the fluctuation starts with the blue hold, it is easier to select a shorter fluctuation time than when the fluctuation starts with the red hold (in other words, the fluctuation time with a low hit expectation is more likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach, and 7 reach has a higher expectation of big hit than other reach (example: 2 reach)) (first). 2 Decorative symbols do not have a specific reach mode and continue to display fluctuations), but when the fluctuation starts with blue hold, the specific reach mode is more than when the fluctuation starts with red hold, which will be described later. The probability of becoming is low. Next, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed in a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) are hit, but if the fluctuation starts in blue hold, it changes in red hold. The probability of a particular final display mode is lower than when it is started. Next, the case of "(2) Red hold change" will be described. The basic flow is the same as "(1) Blue hold change effect", but the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) is different. First, it is in a variable stop state with four holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the number of holds is four due to the new ball entry, and the display mode of the first hold display corresponding to the new ball entry is the red hold. Next, the fluctuation immediately before the red hold is completed, and the fluctuation immediately before is lost (“861”) and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the variation corresponding to the red hold is started, and the red hold is displayed as the effect hold display (red) of the change. When the fluctuation starts with the red hold, a longer fluctuation time is more likely to be selected than when the fluctuation starts with the blue hold (in other words, the fluctuation time with a high expectation of hitting is more likely to be selected). Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be displayed in a variable manner), but it is on hold in red. When the fluctuation starts, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is higher than when the fluctuation starts with blue hold. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits are displayed, but if the fluctuation starts with the red hold, the fluctuation starts with the blue hold. The probability of a particular final display mode is higher than when it is started. As an example, the probability of reaching with blue hold is 90% of the fluctuations related to blue hold, and the probability of reaching with red hold is 99% of the fluctuations related to red hold, the difference being 9%. Is. In addition, the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) with blue hold is 5% when reaching with fluctuations related to blue hold, and a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) with red hold. The probability of becoming is 30% when it reaches the reach due to the fluctuation related to the red hold. The difference is 25%. In this way, the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set so as not to be so high, and the probability of reaching a specific reach mode (for example, 7 reach) is set so as not to be large in both blue hold and red hold. Moreover, it is desirable that the difference be large as it is. As a result, while the expectation of reaching by changing the hold is guaranteed to some extent, by setting a difference in the expectation for the subsequent development (which number will reach), the first hold display will be displayed. The content suggested by the difference in display mode can be complicated. These numerical values (percentages) are examples and can be changed as appropriate, but it is desirable to have such a magnitude relationship.

When the first decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the second decorative symbol may also be configured to be in the reach mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the relationship between the number of reservations and the probability that the first decorative symbol will be in a predetermined display mode will be described. First, the case of "(1) Number of pending numbers 1" will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold. Then the fluctuations have begun. When the fluctuation starts with the number of holds 1, it is easier to select a longer fluctuation time than when the fluctuation starts with the number of holds 4, which will be described later. Next, the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not have a specific reach mode and continues to be displayed in a variable manner), but has a specific reach. The probabilities of the modes are the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations. Next, a specific final display mode (here, 7 sets) in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits are displayed, but the probability of becoming the specific final display mode is irrespective of the number of reservations. Same or slightly different. Next, the case of "(2) Number of reservations 4" will be described. The flow at the time of fluctuation is the same as "(1) Number of holds 1", so it is omitted. Easy to do. Further, as described in the explanation of "(1) Number of reservations 1", the first decorative symbol has a specific reach mode (here, 7 reach) (if the second decorative symbol has a specific reach mode). However, the probability of becoming a specific reach mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are hits. Although the final display mode (here, 7 sets) is displayed, the probability of becoming a specific final display mode is the same or slightly different regardless of the number of reservations.

When the first decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the second decorative symbol may also be configured to be in the reach mode.

Next, the relationship between the gaming state and the final display mode will be described with reference to FIG. 133. First, the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold. Next, the fluctuation is started, the first decorative symbol becomes the reach mode (here, 7 reach) (the second decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the variable display is continued), and finally, the first decoration. The symbol and the second decorative symbol are the final display modes showing the hitting mode, but as the final display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, in addition to the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), a latent mode is used. It is configured so that a mode transition symbol (eg, a "latent" symbol) indicating the transition to is displayed. Next, the time-saving game state will be described. The explanation of the flow of fluctuation is omitted because it is the same as the non-time reduction game state. In the time reduction game state, the final display mode in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol indicate the hitting mode is only the symbol alignment (for example, "777"), and the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the latent mode is performed. Is configured not to be displayed. That is, as for the number of candidates for the final display mode, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are provided in the non-time-reduced gaming state more than in the time-reduced gaming state. With this configuration, when hitting from the non-time shortened gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is included to make various game features, and when hitting from the time shortened gaming state, the transition to the latent mode is not included. , The game state can be recognized by the player, that is, the game can be made simple and clear during the consecutive villas. Further, after a specific reach mode (again, a high expectation of 7 reach is desirable), there are "767", "787", and "777" in the non-time reduction game state, and 1/3 of each appears as an example. On the other hand, in the time-reduced game state, there are "787" and "777", and as an example, 1/2 of each appears, and in the time-reduced game state, the probability of being off is reduced to reach 7 reach. In that case, it is possible to limit the fact that the middle symbol comes off without reaching 7, and it is possible to raise the degree of expectation as compared with the non-time reduction game state.

In the non-time reduction game state, as the final display mode indicating the hit mode, the mode transition symbol indicating the transition to the latent mode can be displayed in the first decorative symbol, but the first decorative symbol can be displayed in the second decorative symbol. The mode transition symbol displayed on the symbol may not be displayed, and may be configured to indicate that the mode transition symbol is shifted to the latent mode in a different final display mode. For example, in the second decorative symbol, such as "357" or "246". In addition, a combination of odd-numbered symbols or a combination of even-numbered symbols may be displayed, and a combination of odd-numbered symbols may be configured so that the probability of being in a probability fluctuation state in the latent mode is higher than that of a combination of even-numbered symbols. ..

Next, the relationship between the game state and the hitting warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) will be described with reference to FIG. 134. First, the striking warning display in the non-time reduction game state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold on the first main game side. Here, there is no display indicating how to hit the player. Next, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, and a left-handed warning is given. The display is performed until the end condition (for example, 10 seconds, entering the first main game start port A10, etc.) is satisfied, and a warning is given by voice together with the left-handed warning display (for example, "left-handed". Please do "x 3 times). The left-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position easily recognized by the player, but overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. Is configured not to be displayed. Even if the ball enters the first main game start port A10 in the non-time shortened game state and the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are updated, the ball is left-handed. No warning is displayed. Next, the striking warning display in the time-saving game state will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with one hold on the second main game side. Here, a right-handed instruction display (“→→ right-handed →→”), which is a display indicating how to hit the player, is displayed. The right-handed instruction display (“→→ right-handed →→”) is displayed in the time-saving game state, and does not depend on the update display of the number of holds (for example, the addition of the second hold display), and the time is shortened. If it is in the game state, it will be displayed continuously. Next, when the game ball enters the first main game start port A10, the second hold display on the first main game side is updated (the first hold display on the first main game side is not displayed), and further. , The right-handed warning display is performed until the end condition (for example, entering the second main game start port B10, etc.) is satisfied, and the right-handed warning display and the voice warning are also given (for example, "right-handed". please"). The right-handed warning display may be displayed overlapping with the first decorative symbol in order to be displayed at a position easily recognized by the player, but overlaps with the second decorative symbol, the first hold display, and the second hold display. Is configured not to be displayed. Even if the ball enters the second main game start port B10 in the time-reduced game state and the first hold display on the second main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side are updated, a right-handed warning is given. No display is made. In addition, a voice warning ("Please hit right", "Please hit left") is output without displaying the hitting warning display (left-handed warning display, right-handed warning display) on the effect display device SG. It may be configured to be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the relationship between the look-ahead effect and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (re-variation probability) will be described. First, the flow of the production will be explained using the case of "blue hold change-> re-variation (pseudo-ream)". First, there are three holds on the first main game side, and the first hold display is displayed in blue hold, which is a variable stop state. Next, the fluctuation due to the blue hold is started (blue is displayed as the hold display for the effect of the fluctuation), and "6" is displayed in the left column and "7" is displayed in the right column. As a notice, a pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol (here, translucent "NEXT") in which the pseudo-continuous symbol (here, non-transparent "NEXT") described later is translucent is displayed from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. It is scrolled to. Next, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled to the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-ream symbol indicating that the pseudo-ream is generated is displayed at the substantially center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, re-variation is performed so that the symbol is in a fluctuating state in all the symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. As the first decorative symbol, a pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and a pseudo-ream symbol can be displayed, but as the second decorative symbol, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are not displayed. Next, the display mode (in this example, the blue hold change and the red hold change) of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect) and the probability that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed will be described. As described above, when the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed, a pseudo-ream that becomes a re-variation occurs, but the probability that the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed is configured to differ depending on the display mode of the look-ahead effect (hold change effect). For example, a blue hold with a low hit expectation has a low probability of re-variation (probability of occurrence of pseudo-ream), and a red hold with a high hit expectation has a high probability of re-variation (that is,). The probability of re-variation may be configured as red hold> blue hold). In the above, the case where the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are displayed from the display in which the left symbol and the right symbol are not the same (not reach) is not limited to this, but the left symbol and the right symbol are not limited to this. Not only is the configuration in which the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol are displayed from the same reach display, the first decorative symbol is revariable (pseudo-ream), but the second decorative symbol is also revariable (pseudo-ream). ) A possible configuration, a configuration in which the pseudo-ream symbol is a specific symbol (for example, "7") may be used, and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the symbol string in which the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed are in the left column or the right column. There may be. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (abbreviated in the center of the effect display device SG) or in the vicinity of the hold display} without scrolling. It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed. In this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is scrolled and fluctuates so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol sequence (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, using FIG. 136, the pseudo-ream during the fluctuation of the probability that the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed during the pre-reading effect display (re-variation probability) and the trigger variation (variation related to the hold that triggered the start of the pre-reading effect). The relationship between the probability of displaying a symbol (probability of re-variation) will be described. First, there are two holds and the fluctuation is stopped. Next, the fluctuation is started, and the background is displayed in translucent black, which is a display mode with a high degree of expectation of the look-ahead effect. In this way, when the display mode with a high degree of expectation of the look-ahead effect is displayed, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol may be configured not to be displayed, and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol may be displayed. May be displayed, but with a low probability. Next, the fluctuation is stopped while the background is continuously displayed in translucent black. Next, the trigger fluctuation is started, and the background is a normal background (not translucent black). Next, with "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled from the top to the bottom of the effect display device SG. Next, the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is scrolled to the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed at the substantially center of the effect display device SG. Since the pseudo-continuous symbol has stopped, next, re-variation is performed so that the symbol is in a fluctuating state in all the symbol columns, including "6" displayed in the left column and "7" displayed in the right column. ing. In this way, in the fluctuation related to the hold prior to the fluctuation related to the hold that triggered the occurrence of the look-ahead effect (so-called trigger fluctuation), the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a display mode with a high degree of expectation (here, translucent). A black background) can be displayed, but the pseudo-ream pattern is not displayed and re-variation (pseudo-ream) does not occur, or when the display mode of the look-ahead effect is a display mode with a high degree of expectation, the look-ahead effect is displayed. It may be configured so that the probability that the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed and re-variation (pseudo-ream) occurs is lower than when the display mode of is low expectation, and in the trigger fluctuation, the high expectation of the look-ahead effect is high. Since the display mode of the degree cannot be displayed and the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol can be displayed, re-variation (pseudo-ream) may occur, or the pseudo-ream is more than the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger fluctuation. It may be configured so that the symbol is displayed and the probability that re-variation (pseudo-ream) occurs is high. Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (abbreviated in the center of the effect display device SG) or in the vicinity of the hold display} without scrolling. It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed. In this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is scrolled and fluctuates so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol sequence (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, using FIG. 137, the decorative symbol after the power is turned off and the power is turned off and restored (when the RAM is not cleared, that is, when S1002 → S1008 → S1010 → S1012 → S1014 → ... In FIG. 5). The relationship between First, (A) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage A (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after returning from the power off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed as before the power was turned off. There is. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after the power is turned off, etc., and is displayed as "861" here. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, after returning from the power off, stage A, which is set as the default stage, is displayed, and unlike before the power off, "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)" is displayed. There is. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is numerically displayed as "861". Next, (C), which is a modified example of (A), will be described. First, the player is staying in stage A (the fluctuation is stopped), and the first decorative pattern is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, the stage A, which is set as the default stage after returning from the power off, is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is different from the one before the power off, which is the default display when the power is turned off. 4, 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe) "is displayed. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is numerically displayed as "861". Here, only the first decorative symbol is changed, but if the power is cut off during the stay in stage B and the power is restored, the default stage, stage A, is the first decoration when the power is turned off and restored. It returns with "2 (friend), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" which is the default display of the symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 138, the relationship between the decorative symbols after the power is turned off and after the power is turned off (when the RAM is cleared. When S1002 → S1004 → S1006 → ... In FIG. 5) will be described. First, (A) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage A (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is an animal or a person, and is displayed as "8 (elephant), 6 (giraffe), 1 (chick)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, when the RAM is cleared, the power is restored from the power off, and the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. Unlike before the power is turned off, the default display of the first decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared is "3 (penguins)". , 3 (penguins), 1 (chicks) ”. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is only a numerical display regardless of the stage, before and after the power is turned off, etc., and is displayed as "331" here. Next, (B) will be described. First, since the character is staying in stage B (stopping fluctuation), the character of the first decorative pattern is a fruit or a person, and is displayed as "8 (watermelon), 6 (apple), 1 (grape)". .. The second decorative pattern is numerically displayed as "861". Next, the power is cut off, and nothing is displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, when the RAM is cleared, the power is restored from the power off, and the stage A set as the default stage is displayed. ), 3 (penguins), 1 (chick) ”. The display mode of the second decorative symbol is numerically displayed as "331".

In this way, when the RAM is cleared (RAM is cleared and the power is turned off and restored), a predetermined display mode (here, stage A) is displayed regardless of the effect state (stage or the like) before the power is turned off or the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. , The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are both "331"), so that the player, the game clerk, and the like can easily grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

The default display of the first decorative symbol when the RAM is cleared, "3 (penguins), 3 (penguins), 1 (chicks)" may be a display mode that can be displayed only when the RAM is cleared, or during a normal game. However, for example, it may be configured to be displayed as a premier effect in which a big hit is almost confirmed. Further, the display mode when the RAM is cleared is set to the same display mode as the default display mode when the power is turned off and restored (the display mode is the same as (C) in FIG. 137), and when the RAM is cleared, the first decorative symbol is "2 ( "Friend), 4 (enemy), 6 (giraffe)" may be displayed, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed as "246" in numbers.

Next, using FIG. 139, the probability that the reach voice (a notice that suggests the hit expectation degree etc. by the sound generated when the reach is established) and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed (re-variation probability), which is the effect at the time of reach. The relationship between The hit expectation of reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot. In addition, it should be added in advance that this figure explains the probability of re-variation due to the reach voice when the reach is established in the fluctuation that develops to a predetermined SP reach after the reach is established. First, (A) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "reach" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "reach" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to high. Next, (B) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "chance" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "chance" occurs when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to the middle. Next, (C) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "development" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-continuous pattern "NEXT" is not displayed on the effect display device SG, but develops into a super reach effect, and the super reach effect is displayed. In this way, when the reach voice of "development" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is 0, and the super reach effect is directly developed without re-variation. Next, (D) will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Next, the fluctuation is started, the reach is established, and the voice of "super hot" is generated as the reach voice. Next, the pseudo-ream symbol "NEXT" is displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG (middle row of the first decorative symbol), and is re-variable (pseudo-ream). In this way, when the reach voice of "super hot" is generated when the reach is established, the re-variation probability is set to low.

In this way, the probability of re-variation (pseudo-ream) decreases as the reach voice with high hit expectation occurs, but some reach voices occur among the reach voices with high hit expectation. In this case (here, the reach voice of "development"), re-variation (pseudo-ream) is configured so as not to occur. It should be noted that, among the reach voices with high hit expectations, even if some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur, re-variation (pseudo-ream) is configured to occur. When some reach voices (for example, "development" reach voices) occur, the re-variation probability is set high (for example, the re-variation probability is higher than that of "chance"). You may.

In other words, the hit expectation by reach voice is reach <chance <development <super hot, and the probability of re-variation (pseudo-ream) by reach voice is
(1) Development (including non-occurrence) <super hot <chance <reach (2) super hot <chance <development ≤ reach, and so on, it is possible to configure the order different from the hit expectation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a display mode of the decorative symbol in the full rotation effect will be described. First, it is in a variable stop state with three holds. Then the fluctuations have begun and are in reach. Next, the characters "full rotation" are displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device SG, and the symbols are aligned in the left, middle, and right columns of the first decorative symbol (for example, "777" and "888". , Etc.), and the scroll display is slower than the normal fluctuation (for example, the state of the second figure). As described above, the first decorative symbol can be scrolled and displayed with the symbols aligned, but the first decorative symbol can be scrolled and displayed even when the symbols are aligned. Is displayed in a variable manner individually in the left column, middle column, and right column with the symbols not aligned, and does not become low speed (= keeps a constant speed). Next, substantially at the same time that the first decorative symbol is fixed and stopped, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned only with numbers. The second decorative symbol may also be configured to be variablely displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned (for example, "777", "888", etc.) so as to be synchronized with the first decorative symbol.

Next, the variation mode of the decorative symbol for each stage will be described with reference to FIG. 141. First, stage A will be described. In stage A, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a scroll display that moves the display area of the effect display device SG from top to bottom, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (second). The variable display is performed by the scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the display area of the decorative pattern). Next, stage B will be described. In stage B, when the fluctuation starts, the first decorative symbol is horizontally rotated on the spot to change the symbol, and the second decorative symbol is displayed on the spot (second) as in stage A. The variable display is performed by the scroll display that appears to move from top to bottom in the display area of the decorative pattern). In this way, since the first decorative symbol is a symbol that is easy for the player to see, the player is not bored by changing the variation mode depending on the stage, and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to see. Since it is a symbol, it is displayed in the same variation mode without changing the variation mode depending on the stage.

Next, the details of the display contents of the decorative symbol during the change will be described with reference to FIG. 142. First, (A) will be described. FIG. (A) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the variable pattern that becomes the reach. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left column, middle row, and right column of the first decorative symbol, the fluctuation is changed in a variation mode in which the symbol is changed by rotating horizontally, and the second decorative symbol is changed. In each of the left column, middle column, and right column, the fluctuation mode is such that vertical scrolling is performed on the spot. In each symbol row of the first decorative symbol, the symbols are changed in a regular order as "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...", and in the second decorative symbol, Regardless of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined symbol variation is uniformly performed, and "275"-> "864"-> "387"-> "641"-> "728"-> "413". → "156" → "532" → "275" → ... The symbols are scrolled and switched. Next, at the timing when the reach is established with "7" in the first decorative symbol and at the timing when the changing "6" is located in the central part of the middle symbol row (substantially the center of the effect display device SG). As for the changing second decorative symbol, "275" is located in the sub-region, and thus the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol at a predetermined timing when the reach is established are different. Further, in the second decorative symbol, the symbols in the left column and the right column are different, and the reach is not established.

Next, (B) will be described. (B) is a diagram relating to the display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the variable pattern that is lost without reaching. First, the fluctuation is stopped at stage B. Next, the fluctuation is started, and in each of the left column, middle row, and right column of the first decorative symbol, the fluctuation is changed in a variation mode in which the symbol is changed by rotating horizontally (high-speed fluctuation). 2 In each of the left column, middle column, and right column of the decorative symbols, the fluctuation mode is such that vertical scrolling is performed on the spot. Next, it is the timing immediately before the stop of the left column, the left column of the first decorative symbol is in a low-speed fluctuation state, "8" is displayed, and the middle column and the right column are in a high-speed fluctuation. At this time (for a moment), "868" is displayed (however, the symbol on the right is not reach because it is changing at high speed). The second decorative symbol is fluctuating at a normal speed (the second decorative symbol fluctuates only at a substantially normal speed. It may be configured to fluctuate at a low speed during a full rotation effect), and at this time (for a moment). However, "864" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the left column, the left column of the first decorative symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped), and the middle and right columns of the first decorative symbol are changing at high speed, and at this time (in an instant). (Although there is), "168" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "387" is displayed. Next, it is the timing immediately before the stop of the right column, in the left column of the first decorative symbol, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "5" is displayed during low speed fluctuation. Yes, the middle row is changing at high speed, and at this time (for a moment), "165" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "641" is displayed. Next, it is the stop timing of the right symbol. In the left column of the first decorative symbol, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "6" is stopped (temporary stop). The middle row is undergoing high-speed fluctuation, and at this time (for a moment), "166" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and at this time (for a moment), "728" is displayed. Next, it is the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time, in the left column of the first decorative symbol, "1" is stopped (temporary stop), and in the right column, "6" is stopped (temporary stop). The middle row is changing at a low speed, and "116" is displayed. The second decorative symbol is changing at a normal speed, and "413" is displayed. Next, it is the timing when the fluctuation time ends, and a fluctuation stop command indicating the end of the fluctuation time (also to stop and display the fluctuation of the decorative symbol) is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S. Both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol have stopped fluctuating (fixed stop) at "126".

In the first decorative symbol, from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) in the left and right columns to the stop (temporary stop), or from immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop). The symbols are changed in the order in which they are arranged consecutively in advance, resulting in a variable stop (fixed stop), but in the second decorative symbol, the fluctuation stops immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) until the variable stop (fixed stop). The symbol displayed immediately before the stop (fixed stop) is changed to the final stop symbol in an instant, resulting in a variable stop (fixed stop). In this example, in the first decorative symbol, the left column is changed to "8 → 1" from immediately before the stop (temporary stop) in the left column to the stop (temporary stop) in the left column, and the stop in the right column (temporary stop). From immediately before the temporary stop) to the stop (temporary stop) in the right column, the right column is changed to "5 → 6", and from immediately before the variable stop (fixed stop) to the variable stop (fixed stop), the middle The column has been changed from "1 to 2". In the second decorative symbol, since it continues to fluctuate at the normal speed until the fluctuation stop, the symbol displayed immediately before the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is changed to "126", which is the final stop symbol, in an instant. , The left column is changed to "3 → 1", the middle column is changed to "6 → 2", and the right column is changed to "2 → 6". However, since the symbols are randomly displayed during the change of the second decorative symbol, the symbol displayed immediately before the change stop (fixed stop) and the final stop symbol may accidentally continue.

Further, the symbol arrangement pattern of the second decorative symbol may be regularly continuous. For example, as in the case of the first decorative symbol, "1 → 2 → 3 → ... → 7 → 8 → 1 → ...・ ”May be displayed, but in this case, the symbols displayed in the left column, the middle column, and the right column are displayed differently. Specifically, if the specifications are such that the display is shifted by one, the left column starts with "1" and starts with "1 → 2 → 3 → ...", and the middle column starts with "2" and starts with "2 → 3 → 4". → ... ”, the right column starts with“ 3 ”and is changed to“ 3 → 4 → 5 → ... ”, and is changed to the final stop symbol at the time of variable stop (fixed stop).

In this way, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) (final stop symbol) are continuous or continuous. In many cases, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol displayed at the timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation time and the symbol displayed at the time of the fluctuation stop (fixed stop) (final stop symbol) are not continuous or continuous. There are many things.

Next, the pseudo-continuous symbol, the developed symbol, and the relationship between the pseudo-continuous symbol and the developed symbol will be described. In the following description, the configuration for displaying the first decorative symbol, the first hold display, etc. during the super reach, etc. will be shown, but as described above, the first decorative symbol, the first hold display, etc. will be displayed during the super reach, etc. A configuration that does not display may be adopted.

Next, FIG. 143 is an image diagram showing a display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol when the revariation is executed. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". The first decorative symbol is composed of a character and a number symbol, and the second decorative symbol is composed of only a number symbol. Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start symbol variation. Next, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed with "6" on the left and right symbols to form a reach, and further, in the first decorative symbol display area (main area), re-variation (for example). , Pseudo-continuous fluctuation) is executed or not, the semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol ("re-variation suggestion symbol", "pseudo-ream suggestion symbol (pseudo-ream suggestion effect)") is displayed from the top to the bottom of the LCD screen. It is displayed as a move. Next, when re-variation is executed, a non-transparent "NEXT" symbol (also referred to as "re-variation symbol" or "pseudo-continuous symbol") is placed substantially in the center of the LCD screen instead of the translucent "NEXT" symbol. Is displayed. At this time, the symbol suggesting re-variation is not displayed in the second decorative symbol display area (sub-region). After the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start the symbol variation again (the first before the symbol variation is started again). 1 The stop status of the decorative pattern is also called "temporary stop"). At this time, since the number of holdings remains three, it can be seen that one symbol change makes it appear as if the symbol has changed a plurality of times. Next, in the symbol change performed again, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach again at "7", and then the super reach effect is executed. Since the variation was a loss, the first decorative symbol and the second Both decorative symbols are not doublet, and the reach loss symbol ("717") has been confirmed and stopped. During the super reach effect, the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed in the center of the LCD screen, so even if it is the first decorative pattern, only the number symbol is displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen ( (Also referred to as "display mode at the time of evacuation"), the player is made to pay attention to the battle effect, and after the battle effect is completed, it is displayed with a decorative symbol composed of characters and numerical symbols as in the case of the start of fluctuation. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol is displayed at a predetermined position {for example, in the center of the middle symbol row (abbreviated in the center of the effect display device SG) or in the vicinity of the hold display} without scrolling. It may be suggested that re-variation (pseudo-ream) is performed. In this case, the pseudo-ream symbol is scrolled and fluctuates so as to be displayed in the central portion of the middle symbol sequence (approximately the center of the effect display device SG). You may.

Next, FIG. 144 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a specific symbol is displayed and a super reach effect is produced. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start symbol variation. Next, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed with "6" on the left and right symbols to form a reach, and further, in the first decorative symbol display area, it is expected to develop into a super reach effect. After the specific symbol (also referred to as the development symbol) "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. When a specific symbol is displayed in the first decorative symbol display area, the symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed is not displayed in the second decorative symbol display area. In addition, although "development" and "development !!!" are different symbols, the super reach effect, which is the same development destination, can be executed regardless of which one is displayed. Furthermore, the degree of expectation to win is different between "development" and "development !!!", and when "development !!!" is displayed, the big hit expectation is higher than when "development" is displayed. The degree is high. In addition, there are multiple types of super reach effects, for example, super reach effects with different characters and different expectations for hitting, and super reach effects such as the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are configured in multiple stages. As a development pattern for super reach production, it has not only a pattern that becomes the second half of super reach via the first half of super reach, but also a pattern that displays the second half of super reach without going through the first half of super reach. May be good. Therefore, when "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, for example, the super reach effect A (character A) may be displayed together. At this time, the super reach effect A may be displayed. It is possible to configure the jackpot expectations to be different (“development” → super reach production A and “development !!!” → super reach production A have different jackpot expectations). In addition, in the case of being composed of the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach, the same first half of super reach is displayed when "development" is displayed and when "development !!!" is displayed. Even so, it is possible to configure the ratio to be the latter half of the super reach to be different. Of course, depending on the type of development symbol (“development”, “development !!!”, etc.), the possibility of developing into a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit among a plurality of types of super reach may differ. In addition, a low expectation super reach with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, a super reach production by a giraffe described later) and a high expectation super reach with a relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, a battle production with a super reach production). ) May be provided.

As a supplement, here, the first decorative symbol is composed of the first element (for example, a number) and the third element (for example, a character) at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, and before the development of super reach. However, under certain circumstances caused by the production pattern (for example, during super reach, moving characters, probabilistic promotion production, error screen display. Here, super reach), only the first element (number) is used. It is configured.

Next, FIG. 145 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a development symbol is displayed corresponding to the notice type and a super reach effect is produced. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, a notice is displayed during the symbol change (a "comment notice" that suggests the jackpot expectation with letters in an oval frame, and a "timer" that displays the time until the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation is displayed. "Notice" and "next notice" indicating that the change will result in super reach) will be given. First, when "chance", which is a "comment notice", is displayed, "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when "00:10: 00" (a display indicating that some kind of effect will occur after 10 seconds), which is a "timer notice", is displayed, it is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed. After "Development !!!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the "next SP reach" which is the "next notice" is displayed, the specific symbol is not displayed and the super reach effect is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "comment notice", "development !!!" is displayed after "timer notice", and a specific symbol is not displayed after "next notice". Has been done. In this case, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "comment notice" and "development !!!" is displayed after "timer notice", but this is not the only case. Instead, "Development !!!" is displayed after "Comment Notice", and "Development" can be displayed after "Timer Notice", and "Development !!!" is displayed after "Comment Notice". The percentage of "Development !!!" displayed after "Timer notice" may be higher than the percentage of "Timer notice", and "Comment notice" is displayed rather than "Development" is displayed after "Timer notice". The percentage of "development" displayed after is may be high. In addition, there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!" mentioned above (big hit expectation: development <development !!!), and "comment notice", "timer notice" and "next notice". There is also a difference in the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is comment notice <timer notice <next notice.

Next, FIG. 146 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is obtained when different display modes are used among the same notice types. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, a notice display {"Comment notice" ("Chance" and "Gekijou !!" are both comment notices) that suggests a big hit expectation with letters in an oval frame} is lined during the symbol change. Will be. First, when "chance" is displayed, "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, and the super reach effect is executed. On the other hand, when the display of "super heat !!" is displayed, the super reach effect is executed after the specific symbol "development !!!" indicating that the super reach effect is developed is displayed. In this way, "development" is displayed after "chance", and "development !!!" is displayed after "super heat !!". In this case, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after "chance" and "development !!!" is displayed after "super heat !!". Not limited, "Development !!!" can be displayed after "Chance", and "Development" can be displayed after "Fever !!", and "Development !!!" is displayed after "Chance". The percentage of "development !!!" displayed after "super heat !!" may be higher than the percentage of "super heat !!", and the percentage of "development" displayed after "fierce heat !!" The rate at which "development" is displayed after "chance" may be higher than that. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectations between "development" and "development !!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectations between "chance" and "super heat !!" "!" Has a higher expectation of big hit than "chance".

Next, FIG. 147 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different look-ahead effects are performed to obtain a super reach effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, the first hold display changes to blue, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "861". Next, "development" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold (hold that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect. Here, the blue hold display), and the super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when a continuous roll (here, "123") occurs in which the combination of decorative symbols when the fluctuation is stopped is a chance look-ahead, "Development !!!" is displayed in the symbol fluctuation related to the trigger hold. , A super reach effect (not shown) is performed. When the chance look-ahead occurs, a special effect is generated around the first decorative symbol that has been fixed and stopped, making it easier to recognize that the chance look-ahead has occurred, and the special effect is generated for the second decorative symbol. It may be configured so that it does not occur. In this way, "development" is displayed after the hold change effect is displayed as the look-ahead effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance eye is displayed as the look-ahead effect. There is. In this case, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after the pending change effect and "development !!!" is displayed after the chance look-ahead, but this is not limited to this. "Development !!!" is displayed after the hold change effect, and "Development !!!" is displayed after the chance look-ahead rather than the rate where "Development !!!" is displayed after the hold change effect. In this case, "development" may be displayed after the chance look-ahead, and "development" may be displayed after the chance look-ahead. The percentage of "development" displayed may be high. As mentioned above, just as there is a difference in jackpot expectation between "development" and "development !!!", there is also a difference in jackpot expectation between the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead, and the chance look-ahead is more than the hold change effect. Expectations for big hits are high. In this example, the explanation was made using the correspondence between the pending change effect and the development pattern (“development”, “development !!!”) in the chance look-ahead, but if it is a look-ahead effect, other effects may be used. Often, for example, it can also be applied to the "angel zone" and the "true angel zone", which are background change effects. Further, in this example, the difference in the jackpot expectation in one look-ahead effect (hold change effect or chance look-ahead) has been used, but whether or not a plurality of types of look-ahead effects have been executed at the same time or are executed at the same time. Depending on the number of pre-reading effects (composite number of pre-reading effects), the correspondence with the development symbols (“development” and “development !!!”) may be different. For example, when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, when the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effect) are executed, the development symbol in the trigger fluctuation Is easy to display, or when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of "development !!!" is displayed, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (look-ahead effect is 2). The rate at which "Development !!!" is displayed may be higher when "Development !!!" is displayed. In this case, there are two types of hold change effect and chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effect). ) Is displayed, even if the ratio of "development" displayed is higher than the ratio of "development" displayed when only the pending change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed. good. In addition, as with the developed symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also a pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT”” depending on whether or not a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are executed at the same time or the number of pre-reading effects (composite number of pre-reading effects) being executed at the same time. The correspondence with "NEXT !!!") may be different. For example, when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the case where the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead effect (two types of look-ahead effect) are executed is a pseudo-ream in the trigger fluctuation. When the design is easy to display, or when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed, the ratio of "NEXT !!!" is displayed, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead effect (look-ahead effect) When (2 types) are executed, the ratio of "NEXT !!!" is displayed may be higher. In this case, the hold change effect and the chance look-ahead (look-ahead effect is 2). The rate at which "NEXT" is displayed is higher than the rate at which "NEXT" is displayed when only the hold change effect (one type of look-ahead effect) is executed. May be good.

Next, FIG. 148 is an image diagram showing a display transition when different display modes of the same look-ahead effect type are performed to obtain a super reach effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, a new hold display (“trigger hold”) is created by newly entering the first main game start port A10 during the symbol change and winning the pre-reading lottery at the time of winning (the hold is also referred to as “trigger hold”). "Display") is displayed in blue (that is, blue is determined in the hold change effect, which is one of the look-ahead effects). Next, when the trigger hold display remains blue and does not change, "development" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. On the other hand, when the trigger hold display changes from blue to red, "development !!!" is displayed in the symbol change related to the trigger hold, and a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. In this way, "development" is displayed after the blue color is displayed in the hold change effect, and "development !!!" is displayed after the red color is displayed in the hold change effect. .. Here, it is assumed that "development" is displayed after blue and "development !!!" is displayed after red, but this is not limited to this, and even after blue. "Development !!!" may be displayed, and the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after red may be higher than the ratio of "Development !!!" displayed after blue, in this case. In some cases, "development" is displayed after red, and "development" may be displayed after blue at a higher rate than "development" is displayed after red. It should be noted that there is a difference in the jackpot expectation between blue and red, which are the display modes of the pending change effect, and red has a higher jackpot expectation than blue. In this example, the correspondence between the display mode in the hold change effect and the development pattern (“development” and “development !!!”) is used, but if it is a look-ahead effect, it does not have to be the hold change effect. For example, it can be applied to the "angel zone" and the "true angel zone" which are background change effects.

Next, FIG. 149 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into the same super reach effect via different displays. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, after the specific symbol "development" or "development !!!" indicating that the super reach effect is developed is displayed, the low expectation super reach effect (first half of the super reach) in which the big hit expectation is relatively low is displayed. ), The effect that the giraffe destroys the middle symbol is executed, and the symbol combination (“656”) of the reach loss is displayed in the low expectation super reach effect. Although only the number symbol is displayed during the low expectation super reach, the first decorative symbol may be the first decorative symbol composed of the number symbol and the character symbol. Next, a high-expectation super-reach production (the latter half of the super-reach) with a relatively high jackpot expectation is executed. Here, it is shown that it is possible to develop into a super reach production regardless of whether "development" or "development !!!" is displayed, but "development" and "development !!" In "!", The rate of development to the high expectation super reach production is different, and when "development" is displayed, the high expectation super reach production is executed at a rate of 10%, and "development !!!". Is displayed, the high-expectation super reach effect is executed at a rate of 50%. In addition, 90% when "development" is displayed and 50% when "development !!!" is displayed develops into another high-expectation super reach production (not shown), or high-expectation super. It will return to the normal screen without developing into reach production.

Next, FIG. 150 is an image diagram showing a display transition when developing into a super reach effect via a button effect. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are changing. Next, the decorative symbol forms a reach, and a button effect that enables the player to operate the sub-input button SB is executed. At the time of the button effect, the first decorative symbol is only a number, the left symbol is displayed at the left end of the LCD screen, the right symbol is displayed at the right end of the LCD screen, and a plurality of symbols that can be selected by operating the player sub-input button SB in the center of the LCD screen. The design is displayed in a circle. The multiple symbols include "6", which is a winning symbol, "development" and "development !!!", which indicates that it will be a super reach effect, "5", which is a lost symbol, and "NEXT", which is a pseudo-continuous symbol. It is displayed. When a plurality of symbols rotate in a circle and the sub input button SB can be operated, a button image described as "PUSH" is displayed in the substantially center of the liquid crystal screen, and the sub input button SB is operated. With this as an opportunity, one symbol is displayed. Here, a predetermined "development" is displayed, and after that, a super reach effect (not shown) is executed. If the sub-input button SB is not operated, "development" is displayed after the valid period of the sub-input button SB has elapsed, and the super reach effect is executed. The symbol displayed when the operation of the sub-input button SB is performed is determined in advance by a preliminary lottery of the sub-control board S performed at the start of fluctuation.

The production in this example may be changed as follows.
(1) Before developing into a super reach effect (= until the stage where the illustrated development symbol is displayed), the first decorative symbol is not displayed only with the number symbol, but is composed of the number symbol and the character symbol. The configuration may be such that the first decorative pattern is displayed.
(2) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red color, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of the stopped symbols may be different, for example, a large button image. When is displayed, the ratio of displaying symbols other than lost symbols such as "NEXT", "development", "development !!!", and hit symbols is higher than when a small button image is displayed. You may.
(3) Depending on the type of button image (for example, large button image, small button image, default color, red color, rainbow color, etc.), the ratio of the displayed development symbol or pseudo-continuous symbol may be different. For example, when a large button image is displayed, the ratio of displaying the development symbol is higher than when the small button image is displayed, the ratio of displaying "development !!!" is higher, and the pseudo-ream. The ratio of displaying the symbol may be high, the ratio of displaying "NEXT !!!" may be high, and the like.
(4) Any image may be displayed at a predetermined timing without displaying the button image. Further, the configuration includes a pattern in which the button image is displayed (a pattern in which the player can operate the button) and a pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (a pattern in which the player cannot operate the button). Often, in this case, the pattern in which the button image is displayed is configured to have a higher expectation of jackpot than the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing, or a symbol other than the lost symbol (“NEXT”, It may be configured so that the ratio of "development", "development !!!", hit pattern, etc.) is increased. Further, even if the ratio of the displayed development symbols is different between the pattern in which the button image is displayed and the pattern in which the effect image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, the pattern in which the button image is displayed). May increase the percentage of "Development !!!" displayed).
(5) Pseudo-continuous symbols may be provided not only with "NEXT" but also with multiple types such as "NEXT !!!", and when multiple types are provided, "NEXT !!" rather than "NEXT"! "!" May be configured so that the jackpot expectation is higher, "NEXT !!!" may be displayed in an array pattern in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circle, and further, "NEXT" may be displayed. It may have an arrangement pattern in which "NEXT !!!" is displayed at the same time.
(6) Multiple types of array patterns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a circular shape may be provided, and when a plurality of types are provided, fluctuations with a high expectation of big hit (for example, big hit fluctuation and super reach effect) are obtained. In the case of fluctuation (variation, etc.), even if the arrangement pattern with high jackpot expectation is displayed at a higher rate than in the case of fluctuation with low jackpot expectation (for example, lossless fluctuation without reach). good. For example, as an arrangement pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, an arrangement pattern without a lost symbol (for example, an arrangement pattern displayed as "6 (big hit symbol) / development / development / NEXT / development !!!") or "development""Development!!!" is displayed without "" (for example, "6 ・ Development !!! ・ 5 ・ NEXT ・ Development !!!", "6 ・ Development !!! ・ Development !!! ・ NEXT"・ Arrangement pattern in which "Development !!!" is displayed, etc.).

As in (3), the rate at which the development symbol is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the notice of the change (button effect, comment notice, timer notice, etc.), or the display mode of the notice of the change is changed. By configuring the pseudo-continuous symbols to be displayed at different rates according to the situation, if the display mode of the notice of the change is highly expected, the development symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbols are more likely to be displayed, and the player Can be configured so that the expected degree of jackpot can be easily grasped.

Next, FIG. 151 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a super reach effect is performed in a different effect stage (also referred to as an effect mode). First, the production stage A will be described in detail. On the production stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, after the "development", which is a specific symbol indicating that the reach is formed and the super reach effect is developed, is displayed, the super reach effect is executed. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, after the reach is formed, the super reach effect is executed as it is (that is, "development" which is a specific symbol indicating the development to the super reach effect is not displayed), or when the reach is formed, the effect stage. After displaying "development (a mode in which the inside of the Chinese character is hollowed out as shown)" different from A, the super reach effect is executed. That is, in this example, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is different depending on the production stage, but the display mode of the second decorative symbol is not different (similar), and the first decoration is different depending on the production stage. The developed symbol can be displayed in the symbol, but the developed symbol is not displayed in the second decorative symbol.

Next, FIG. 152 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the revariation is executed in different production stages. First, the production stage A will be described in detail. On the production stage A, a first decorative pattern composed of animal characters and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, after the "NEXT" symbol that forms the reach and indicates that the re-variation is executed is displayed, the symbol variation is started again. Next, the production stage B will be described in detail. On the production stage B, a first decorative pattern composed of fruits and numbers is displayed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, after the symbol combination "678" (order) indicating that the re-variation is executed in the first decorative symbol is displayed (temporarily stopped), the symbol variation is started again or the reach is reached. Is displayed, a “NEXT (a mode in which the inside of the alphabet is hollowed out as shown)”, which is different from the effect stage A, is displayed, and then the symbol variation is started again. In addition, when the re-variation is executed twice depending on which production stage the re-variation is executed, {variation start → temporary stop → re-variation → reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-reach) (Fluctuation)} jackpot expectation and when re-variation is executed 3 times {Fluctuation start → Temporary stop → Re-variation → Temporary stop → Re-variation → Reach (temporary stop due to reach loss) → SP reach development (re-variation)} The difference from the big hit expectation may be different. For example, in the production stage A (for example, the daytime stage or the non-look-ahead stage other than the angel zone), the jackpot expectation when the re-variation is executed twice is 5% on average, and the re-variation is executed three times. The average jackpot expectation is 25%, and the difference is 20% (5 times difference), but it fluctuates again in the production stage B (for example, the night stage or the look-ahead stage such as the angel zone). The average jackpot expectation when is executed twice is 40%, and the jackpot expectation when revariation is executed three times is 50%, and the difference is 10% (1.25 times difference). ) May be used. The difference in the jackpot expectation (expectation for executing a special game) is the one subtracted by the percentage display, the one obtained by dividing the jackpot expectation (1 / N), and the like. Further, although the display mode of the first decorative symbol differs depending on the effect stage (effect stage A, effect stage B), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is the same, and the "NEXT" symbol is used for the first decorative symbol. Although it can be displayed, the second decorative symbol may be configured so that the "NEXT" symbol is not displayed. It should be noted that it has been mainly explained that both the effect stage A and the effect stage B are non-look-ahead stages in the non-probability variation game state and the non-time reduction game state (the game state similar to the above-mentioned daytime stage), but the present invention is not limited to this. , The effect stage A is a non-pre-reading stage in a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction game state (for example, the above-mentioned daytime stage), and the production stage B is a look-ahead stage in a non-probability variation game state and a non-time reduction game state (for example,). Both the effect stage A and the effect stage B, which are configured as the above-mentioned night stage), are configured as a look-ahead stage in the non-probability variable game state and the non-time reduction game state, and both the effect stage A and the effect stage B are in the probability variable game state. It is also possible to configure the stage as a non-look-ahead stage in the time-reduced gaming state, and if a plurality of production stages are provided, the production mode shown in this example can be applied regardless of the game state or the like.

Next, FIG. 153 is an image diagram showing a display transition when a pseudo-continuous symbol and a specific symbol are displayed and a super reach effect is executed. First, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol) are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, a translucent "NEXT" symbol, which forms a reach and suggests that the revariation is executed, is displayed. When the semi-transparent "NEXT" symbol is moved and displayed from the upper part to the lower part of the liquid crystal screen and re-variation is executed, the non-transparent "NEXT" symbol is displayed and then the symbol variation is started again. The symbol is changed again, the reach is formed again, and this time, instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol, "development" indicating that the super reach effect is executed is displayed. After that, the super reach effect is executed, and since the fluctuation is a loss, the determination is stopped at the reach loss symbol (“717”). As shown in this figure, it is possible to display a specific symbol (for example, "development") after displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, "NEXT"), while displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol after displaying the specific symbol. It may be configured so that it cannot be displayed. In addition, the ratio at which the specific symbol is displayed according to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (= whether or not the re-variation is executed), the number of times the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed (= the number of re-variations), and the like. May be different. For example, the larger the number of re-variations, the easier it is to display the specific symbol (= the ratio of the specific symbol being displayed without displaying the lost symbol) may be increased, and the larger the number of re-variations, the easier it is to display. , Even if a specific symbol is displayed, the ratio of "development !!!", which has a high expectation for a big hit, may be high.

As shown in FIG. 154, even when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (when the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed and when the developed symbol is displayed), the second decorative symbol is in the left column, the middle column, and the right column. The variable display is continued in all cases, and the variable display may be continued in all of the left column, the middle column, and the right column of the second decorative symbol even during the super reach.

Next, FIG. 155 is an image diagram showing a display transition when the first decorative symbols are displayed in an overlapping manner. First, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "861", but the left symbol (elephant) and the middle symbol (giraffe), and the middle symbol (giraffe) and the right symbol (chick) are displayed in duplicate. At this time, the middle symbol (giraffe) is arranged behind the LCD screen (the player side is the front) from the left symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick), and a part of the middle symbol (elephant) and the right symbol (chick) are arranged. It is hidden. Next, the decorative symbol starts to change as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Next, a reach is formed, and the middle symbol becomes a low-speed variable display. At this time, the middle symbol is arranged in front of the liquid crystal screen with respect to the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach. In this figure, the chick (“1”) is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed as the middle symbol and does not stop, then the pseudo-continuous symbol (“NEXT” symbol) is fluctuated and displayed at a low speed and stops at approximately the center of the LCD screen. ing. After that, although not shown, after the re-variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is executed, the super reach effect is executed, and since the variation is a loss, the determination is stopped by the reach loss symbol (“717”). When displaying the reach loss symbol, the middle symbol (chick) is placed behind the LCD screen from the left symbol (lion) and the right symbol (lion) as before the fluctuation started, and is a part of the middle symbol (chick). Is hidden. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not displayed in duplicate at any timing. Even when the development symbol ("development" or "development !!!") is displayed instead of the pseudo-ream symbol, the pseudo-ream symbol is displayed as the relationship between the display of the left and right symbols and the middle symbol. It can be the same as the case where. The display mode may be a display mode in stage C or a display mode that can be displayed in a specific variation (variation with a high degree of hit expectation). That is, the display mode in this figure may be a display mode that is not displayed in the stage A or the stage B but can be displayed in the stage C, or is a normal fluctuation (comparison in which the product stops due to loss without reaching). It may be a display mode that can be displayed in a specific fluctuation (a fluctuation with a high degree of expectation per reach) instead of a short-term fluctuation).

Next, FIG. 156 is an image diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation speed of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. First, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at "861". Next, as the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol start symbol variation. At this time, the speed of the first decorative symbol gradually increases from low speed to high speed (low speed → medium speed → high speed). On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the speed of the symbol variation is constant, and the symbol variation is always high speed. Next, when both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become high-speed and the reach is formed by the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, in the first decorative symbol, the middle symbol becomes a low-speed symbol variation, and the second is In the two decorative symbols, the middle symbol is a high-speed symbol variation. After that, during the execution of the super reach effect, the left and right symbols, in which both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol form a reach, are stopped (or temporarily stopped), and only the middle symbol is at high speed. The design is fluctuating. After the super reach production was completed, the fluctuation was a loss, so the decision was stopped with the reach loss symbol (“686”). In this figure, during the execution of the super reach effect, only the middle symbol is changed while the reach is formed in the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the execution of the super reach effect is not limited to this. During the execution of the medium or specific super reach effect, all the first decorative symbols and all the second decorative symbols may be changed. The second decorative symbol may also have a plurality of fluctuation speeds, and in this case, it is preferable that the second decorative symbol is less likely to change the fluctuation speed than the first decorative symbol. For example, the second decorative symbol does not use low speed but uses medium speed (note that the first decorative symbol uses low speed, medium speed, and high speed). Further, the second decorative symbol can be configured so as not to be temporarily stopped in the middle. Specifically, the configuration is always set to high speed or stop (fixed stop), or high speed and medium speed and stop (fixed stop). It is a configuration and the like.

Here, the pseudo-continuous symbol and the developed symbol in the time-reduced game state will be supplemented. In the time-shortening game state, the pseudo-continuous symbol or the developed symbol may be displayed, but it is more preferable to configure the pseudo-continuous symbol or the developed symbol so as not to be displayed. This is because, in the time-reduced game state, the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than in the normal state (non-time-reduced game state), and the effect of suggesting a big hit within one fluctuation is reduced. When displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol or a developed symbol, the one with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected, so the jackpot interval (the period from the end of one jackpot to the start of the next jackpot) is extended. As a result, the speed at which the number of balls will increase during the consecutive villas will slow down. Further, as described above, in the time-saving game state, a short fluctuation time is easily selected and the amount of production is small. Therefore, the variation mode of the first decorative symbol itself and the first decorative symbol may be simple, and the first element. It is preferable that it is composed only of (numbers).

As a supplement, in the sixth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is always displayed during the variable display, and the confirmation is always stopped. However, as described above, the first decorative symbol is visually visible in the second decorative symbol. It may be configured to be displayed when it is impossible or difficult to see, and in this case, the second decorative symbol does not always stop.

Although the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the first main game side are displayed in FIGS. 143 to 156, the first hold display on the second main game side has been described. And the second hold display on the second main game side may also be displayed.

Further, in FIGS. 143 to 156, an example in which the second decorative symbol has a reach mode has been described, but the second decorative symbol may not be in a reach mode (always changing until the final stop). ..

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are just examples, and not only the combination and separation (superimposition) of these listed concepts, but also the concepts based on the further configuration shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts. You may.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first hold number image and the second hold number image.
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are not displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
With
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Even if the number of holds on the first hold and the number of holds on the second hold are the same, the first hold image and the second hold image are configured to have different display modes.
Even if the number of holds on the first hold and the number of holds on the second hold are the same, the first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to have different display modes. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
With
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
In the normal game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. Can be displayed and
The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the first hold number image and the second hold number image can be displayed on the effect display unit in both the normal game state and the specific game state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
With
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. The fluctuation-compatible image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information is displayed, and
In the normal gaming state, the variation-corresponding image can be displayed when the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation-corresponding image is displayed when the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by not doing so.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player.
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first hold number image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold image are configured so that they are not displayed in duplicate.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second effect symbol and the first hold number image are not displayed in duplicate in the effect display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which indicates the number of hold of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second hold, which indicates the number of hold of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or the variable display is displayed.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display section.
The volume adjustment image, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol.
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol do not overlap,
It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol are configured so as not to overlap even during the variable display.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image, which is the hold number of the first hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image, which is the hold number of the second hold, can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
It is possible to update the display of the second hold number when there is a new ball entering the second starting port.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is first held immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a specific display mode than the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
First hold number immediately before the start of the variable display The variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the image is in the predetermined display mode is the first hold number immediately before the start of the variable display. When the image is in a specific display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image.
When the first hold number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the first display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start.
When the first reserved number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image is the variable display. When the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start, the probability that the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the same as the special display mode is the same. It is a pachinko game machine that features it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (17) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode is configured to be larger than the total number of combinations of patterns in the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (18) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. Equipped with
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the second hold number image.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
When the execution of the hold image movement effect is started during the execution of the hold image generation effect, the hold image generation effect and the hold image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image generation effect, and , When the execution of the hold image generation effect is started during the execution of the hold image movement effect, the hold image movement effect and the hold image generation effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image movement effect.
When a new variable display is started during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is displayed. After the execution is completed, the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed, and the execution is completed.
When a new ball enters the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the first hold number image or the second (Ii) A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (19) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol.
In a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed, the effect display unit is configured to display the first hold number image and the second hold number image.
A pachinko game characterized in that the first reserved image and the second reserved image are not displayed in the effect display unit in a situation where both the first identification information and the second identification information are stopped and displayed. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (20) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
With
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Even if the number of holds on the first hold and the number of holds on the second hold are the same, the first hold image and the second hold image are configured to have different display modes.
Even when the number of holds of the first hold and the number of holds of the second hold are the same, the first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured to have different display modes.
When a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed, the hold image generation effect can be executed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, it is possible to update the display of the second reserved number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (21) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
With
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
In the normal game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the specific game state, the number of first hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the first hold is not displayed on the effect display unit, and the number of second hold images corresponding to the number of holds of the second hold is displayed on the effect display unit. Can be displayed and
In both the normal game state and the specific game state, the first hold number image and the second hold number image can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, it is possible to update the display of the second reserved number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (22) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
As a game area where the game ball can flow down, it has a first area and a second area different from the first area.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is performed when the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of pending images that do not satisfy the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information and the variable display start condition of the first identification information or the second identification information are satisfied. The fluctuation-compatible image corresponding to the fluctuation display of the identification information is displayed, and
In the normal gaming state, the variation-corresponding image can be displayed when the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, while the variation-corresponding image is displayed when the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. It is configured not to
The first notification image that notifies that the game ball should be fired toward the first region side can be displayed on the effect display unit.
A second notification image for notifying that the game ball should be fired toward the second region side can be displayed on the effect display unit.
When the first hold number image is updated in the specific game state, the second notification image can be displayed.
The second notification image can be displayed in an overlapping manner with the first effect symbol, while the second effect symbol, the first hold image, the second hold image, the first hold number image, and the second hold number image. Is configured to not be duplicated,
Regardless of whether or not the first hold number image is updated in the specific game state, the image is different from the first notification image and the second notification image, and the game ball should be launched toward the second region side. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that a special notification image for notifying is displayed on the effect display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (23) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute a pseudo-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first reserved image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the normal game state, the effect display unit is configured so that the first effect symbol and the first hold number image can be displayed in duplicate.
In the effect display unit, the second effect symbol and the first hold image are configured so that they are not displayed in duplicate.
This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the second effect symbol and the first hold number image are not displayed in duplicate in the effect display unit.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (24) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A speaker that outputs sound (for example, speaker D24) and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). A second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
With
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker can be adjusted based on the operating state of the operating member while the variable display is stopped or the variable display is displayed.
When the volume level can be adjusted, the volume adjustment image can be displayed on the effect display section.
The volume adjustment image, the first effect symbol, and the second effect symbol can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol, and the display priority of the second effect symbol is higher than the display priority of the first effect symbol.
The volume adjustment image, the first hold image or the second hold image, the first hold number image or the second hold number image can be displayed at the same time.
The display priority of the volume adjustment image is higher than the display priority of the first hold image or the second hold image, and the display priority of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is the first hold image or the second hold image. It is configured to be higher than the display priority of
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the first production symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
During the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the first production symbol can be displayed in duplicate.
While the variable display is stopped, the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol do not overlap,
Even during the variable display, the volume adjustment image and the second production symbol are configured so that they do not overlap.
The total number of combinations of patterns in the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second effect symbol in the normal game state. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (25) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
While the first identification information is variablely displayed, the second identification information is not variablely displayed, and while the second identification information is variablely displayed, the first identification information is not variablely displayed.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is the first hold of one of the remaining plurality of first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that it will be done.
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first hold remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed, while the display mode of the first hold number image is not changed.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, it is possible to update the display of the second reserved number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information. It is a game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (26) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter the second starting port than in the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
In the normal game state,
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is first held immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a specific display mode than the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
When the display mode of the first reserved image is the first display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image is the first hold immediately before the start of the variable display. When the display mode of the image is the second display mode, it is more likely to be a special display mode than the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved image.
First hold number immediately before the start of the variable display The variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the image is in the predetermined display mode is the first hold number immediately before the start of the variable display. When the image is in a specific display mode, it is relatively longer than the variable display time of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first reserved number image.
When the first hold number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the specific display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability that the first display mode will be the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start.
When the first hold number image is in a predetermined display mode immediately before the start of the variable display, the probability that the special display mode is set as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image is the variable display. It is the same as the probability of becoming a special display mode as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the variable display related to the first hold number image when the first hold number image is in a specific display mode immediately before the start.
The total number of combinations of patterns in the final display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal gaming state is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns in the final display mode of the second effect symbol in the normal game state. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (27) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
It has a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set as the reach display mode of the first effect symbol in the normal game state is the reach of the first effect symbol in the specific game state. The display mode is configured to be larger than the total number of combination patterns of the final display mode of the first effect symbol that can be displayed after the special display mode is set.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect symbol corresponding to the first effect mode, and the second display mode, which is the display mode of the specific first effect symbol corresponding to the second effect mode, are different. It is configured to be a display mode,
The specific first effect symbol, which is the first display mode, can be displayed in a variable manner in both the variable display of the first identification information in the first effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the first effect mode. Is composed of
In both the variable display of the first identification information in the second effect mode and the variable display of the second identification information in the second effect mode, the specific first effect symbol, which is the second display mode, can be variablely displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured in.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (28) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , With effect display control means SM20)
The number of first reserved images corresponding to the remaining number of first reserved images can be displayed in the first reserved image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed in the second-held image display area in the effect display unit.
The number of first hold, which is the number of remaining first hold, can be displayed in the first hold display area in the effect display unit.
The number of second hold, which is the number of remaining hold of second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit.
It has a plurality of types of effect display formats, and one of the plurality of types of effect display formats can be displayed on the effect display unit, and when displaying the effect display contents, it corresponds to the displayed effect display format. It is configured to be able to display what you have done
During the variable display of the first identification information, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold, which is the first hold of one of the remaining plurality of first holds, is changed. It is possible to execute a pending change effect that suggests that it will be done.
The hold change effect was executed during the variable display of the first identification information in the situation where the first effect display format among the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed and a plurality of first hold remains. In this case, the display mode of the first hold image displayed corresponding to the change target hold may be changed, while the display mode of the first hold number image is not changed.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
When there is a new ball entering the first starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the first hold number image.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, the first update display can be executed as the display update of the second hold number image.
When a new variable display is started, the second update display can be executed as a display update of the first hold number image or the second hold number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
When the execution of the hold image movement effect is started during the execution of the hold image generation effect, the hold image generation effect and the hold image movement effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image generation effect, and , When the execution of the hold image generation effect is started during the execution of the hold image movement effect, the hold image movement effect and the hold image generation effect can be executed at the same time without interrupting the running hold image movement effect.
When a new variable display is started during the execution of the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is displayed. After the execution is completed, the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed, and the execution is completed.
When a new ball enters the first start port or the second start port during the execution of the second update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image, the first hold number image or the first hold number image or the second (Ii) A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the first update display of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is executed after the execution of the second update display of the hold number image is completed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (29) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game club
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the types is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured differently according to the contents of.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (30) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? A look-ahead effect in which the probability of whether the specific display mode B is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the type is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. This is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the pachinko machine is the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (31) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively higher. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (32) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
In a situation where a specific hold, which is the first hold that satisfies a predetermined condition, exists, a look-ahead effect that suggests or notifies the execution expectation of the special game related to the specific hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (33) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured so that one of the productions can be displayed.
When the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the probability that the specific display mode is displayed at a timing after the timing when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, and when the second operation promotion effect is displayed, the second 2 The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed is different from the timing after the operation promotion effect is displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (34) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured so that one of the productions can be displayed.
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (35) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
It has multiple types of development effects that are executed after the reach is established, and also has multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
Pachinko is characterized in that the probability that a special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect is generated differs depending on which of the plurality of types of post-reach effect is generated. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (36) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
While the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switch display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are configured to be different. ,
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are configured to be the same. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (37) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? The probability that the specific display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the specific display modes of the types is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on the contents of
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or whether the special display mode is a provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times the specific display mode is displayed within the certain effect period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (38) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
As the type of the specific display mode, a plurality of types including at least the specific display mode A and the specific display mode B are provided, and the specific display mode A of the plurality of types of the specific display modes is the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol. It is configured so that the execution expectation of the special game differs depending on whether the specific display mode B of the plurality of types of specific display modes is displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
When the specific display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the specific display mode A selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of specific display modes? A look-ahead effect in which the probability of which of the specific display modes B is selected as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the specific display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on the type of
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or whether the special display mode is a provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times the specific display mode is displayed within the certain effect period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (39) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that a specific display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively higher. And
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or whether the special display mode is a provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times the specific display mode is displayed within the certain effect period.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (40) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-variation is executed, or the re-variation is executed, depending on which of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set. It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
There are a plurality of cases where N (N> 0) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects and cases where M (M> N) types of look-ahead effects are executed among a plurality of types of look-ahead effects. Of the types of look-ahead effects, when M types of look-ahead effects are executed, the probability that the special display mode is displayed in the variable display related to hold, which is the execution trigger of the look-ahead effects, is relatively high. It is a pachinko game machine that is characterized by being played.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (41) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
After the variable display of the first effect symbol is started within a certain effect period, when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed within the certain effect period, the first effect symbol is displayed. When a specific display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode is displayed, one of a plurality of types of development effects may be executed after the specific display mode is displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
Regarding the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the specific display mode is not displayed within the certain effect period.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period, or whether the special display mode is a provisional display of the first effect symbol within a certain effect period. It is configured so that the probability that the specific display mode is displayed differs depending on the number of times the mode is displayed within the certain production period.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured so that one of the productions can be displayed.
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the specific display mode is displayed and the probability that the specific display mode will be displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (42) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
An operating member that can be operated by the player (for example, the cross button SB-2),
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
It has multiple types of effect display formats, and when performing effect display on the effect display unit, it is configured to be able to display the one corresponding to the set effect display format.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed when the re-variation is executed, or the re-variation is executed, depending on which of the plurality of types of effect display formats is set. It is configured so that the display mode of the special display mode displayed when it is displayed is different.
It is possible to display an operation promotion effect that is an effect that encourages the operation of the operation member within one effect period, and by operating the operation member while the operation promotion effect is displayed, a plurality of types of operations can be supported. It is configured so that one of the productions can be displayed.
The types of operation promotion effects include at least a first operation promotion effect and a second operation promotion effect, and when the first operation promotion effect is displayed, the timing is later than the timing at which the first operation promotion effect is displayed. The probability that the special display mode is displayed and the probability that the special display mode is displayed at a timing later than the timing at which the second operation promotion effect is displayed when the second operation promotion effect is displayed. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (43) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The execution expectation of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times within a certain effect period in the first effect mode, and the special display mode within a certain effect period in the first effect mode. The difference in the expected degree of execution of the special game when is displayed N + 1 times is the execution of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N (N> 0) times within a certain production period in the second production mode. It is configured to be smaller than the difference between the expectation level and the execution expectation level of the special game when the special display mode is displayed N + 1 times within a certain production period in the second production mode.
It has multiple types of development effects that are executed after the reach is established, and also has multiple types of post-reach effects that can occur after the reach is established and before the development effects are executed.
Whether or not the special display mode is displayed after the post-reach effect occurs, or the probability that the special display mode is displayed, depending on which of the plurality of types of post-reach effects occurs. It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized by being configured so as to be different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (44) is
A first starting port (for example, the first main game starting port A10) into which a game ball can enter,
A second starting port (for example, a second main game starting port B10) into which a game ball can enter,
Variable winning openings (for example, 1st major winning opening C10, 2nd major winning opening C20) that can be in the open state and the closed state,
The first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information, and
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information, and
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect,
It is equipped with a sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit.
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M)
With the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires the first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, the first main game start port A10). ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means (for example, the first random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 1 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-A) and
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN) that determines the variable display mode of the first identification information, and
Control to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) according to the determination by the first game content determination means. First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
With the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) that acquires the second random number based on the entry into the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means (for example, the second random number temporary storage means) that temporarily stores the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied. 2 Main game symbol reservation information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. A second game content determining means (for example, a game content determining means MN) that determines a variable display mode of the second identification information, and
According to the determination by the second game content determining means (for example, the game content determining means MN), the second identification information display unit is controlled to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed. Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) and
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , With a special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20) can be in an advantageous state for the player. ,
It is provided with a game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) for transmitting game information necessary for displaying an effect executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit side.
The sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) that receives game information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, and
An effect display content control means (for example, an effect display content control means (for example) that controls the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40). , Production display control means SM20),
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The first effect symbol display control means (for example, the decorative symbol display control means SM21) that controls the display, and
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). It is provided with a second effect symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the display.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information is defined as one production period.
For the first effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period, the provisional display mode can be displayed before the final display mode is displayed within the certain effect period, and the provisional display can be displayed. When the mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the re-variation that is displayed again within a certain effect period, and when the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed, it is for the first effect. It is configured so that a special display mode that is not displayed as the final display mode of the symbol can be displayed.
The special display mode is not displayed within a certain effect period for the second effect symbol that is variablely displayed within a certain effect period.
A look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the execution expectation of the special game related to the remaining hold can be executed on the effect display unit.
As the types of pre-reading effects, a plurality of types including at least pre-reading effects A and pre-reading effects B are provided.
When the special display mode is displayed as a provisional display mode of the first effect symbol, is the special display mode A displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol among the plurality of types of special display modes? Of the types of special display modes, the probability that the special display mode B will be displayed as the provisional display mode of the first effect symbol is displayed before the special display mode is displayed. It is configured to be different depending on whether the type of the look-ahead effect A or the look-ahead effect B.
It has at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode as an effect mode that depends on determining the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit.
The switching display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switch display mode in which the symbol type of the first effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are different.
The feature is that the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the first effect mode and the switching display mode in which the symbol type of the second effect symbol is switched and displayed in the second effect mode are the same. It is a pachinko game machine.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 ball entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening ball entry determination means MJ11-B 2nd main game start opening ball entry determination means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entry ball entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st major winning opening ball entry determination means Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning opening ball entry judgment means MJ20 Random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-A 1st main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ21-B 2nd main game random number acquisition judgment execution means, MJ21-H auxiliary Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 hold control means, MJ31 hold digestion control means MJ31j fluctuation start condition satisfaction judgment means, MJ32 symbol hold means MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary Storage means MJ32-B 2nd main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B 2nd main game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol holding means, MJ32b-H Auxiliary game symbol holding information Temporary storage means MN Game content determination Means, MN10 Win / Loss Lottery Means MN11-A 1st Main Game Win / Loss Lottery Means, MN11ta-A 1st Main Game Win / Loss Lottery Table MN11-B 2nd Main Game Win / Loss Lottery Means, MN11ta-B 2nd Main Game Win / Loss Lottery Table MN11-H Auxiliary Game Win / Loss Lottery Means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary Game Win / Loss Lottery Table MN20 Special Game Transition Determining Means, MN40 Symbol Content Determining Means MN41-A 1st Main Game Symbol Determining Means, MN41ta-A 1st Main Game Symbol Determination Lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Variable mode determination means , MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table , MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MP game progress means MP10 display control means, MP11-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol control means MP11t-C 1st 2nd main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP20-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP21-B 2nd main Game start port Electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means, MP2 2t-B 2nd main game start port Electric accessory opening timer MP30 Special game control means, MP31 Condition determination means MP32 Special game content determination means, MP32ta Special game content reference table MP33 Special game execution means, MP33-C 1st and 1st 2 Large winning opening Electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34 Special game time management means MP34t Special game timer, MP50 Specific game control means MP51 Probability change end condition determination means, MP52 Time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction count counter, MB game state temporary storage means MB10-C 1st and 2nd main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary Game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b Special game-related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game-related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 Command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1 Main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device , B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entry ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric accessory B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21g 2nd main game symbol display unit B21h 2nd Main game symbol hold display, C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripherals C10 1st big prize opening, C11s 1st big winning opening Winning detection device C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory, C20 2nd big winning opening C21s 2nd prize opening prize detection device, C21d 2nd prize opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entry ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol Display unit, H21h Auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decorative symbol display control means SM21n design display content determination means, SM21ta lottery table for determining design variation content SM21ta-2 decorative symbol effect table, SM21b drawing-related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 first drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM22 drawing reservation information display control means, SM22b drawing reservation information temporary storage means, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n background effect display content determination Means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notice effect display content determination means SM24b Notice effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect Related information Temporary storage means SM27 Right-handed display control means SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 Sub-information transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display Related information Temporary storage means SG effect display device , SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display unit SG13 2nd hold display unit KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
The second starting port where the game ball can enter and
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed,
The first identification information display unit that can display the first identification information,
A second identification information display unit that can display the second identification information,
The main game department that controls the progress of the game,
A production display unit that can display the production,
Equipped with a sub-game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
The main game club
The first random number acquisition means that acquires the first random number based on the entry into the first start port,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as the first hold until the first hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the first random number temporary storage means.
When the first hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain first hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The first game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information,
The first identification information display control means that controls the first identification information display unit to stop and display the first identification information after the first identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the first game content determination means.
A second random number acquisition means that acquires a second random number based on the entry into the second starting port,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as the second hold until the second hit / fail determination permission condition is satisfied, and the second random number temporary storage means.
When the second hit / fail judgment permission condition for a certain second hold is satisfied, the hit / fail judgment is executed based on the second random number related to the second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is based on the result of the hit / fail judgment. The second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information,
A second identification information display control means that controls the second identification information display unit to stop and display the second identification information after the second identification information is variablely displayed according to the determination by the second game content determination means.
After the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. , A special game control means that can execute a special game that can put the variable winning opening in an advantageous state for the player,
It is equipped with a game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying the effect executed on the sub-game department side to the sub-game department side.
When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped, the new fluctuation display is not started for the predetermined fluctuation display stop time.
The sub-game club
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game department side,
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means, the effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect display content control means.
With
The number of first hold images corresponding to the remaining number of first hold holds can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The number of second-held images corresponding to the remaining number of second-held images can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The first hold number image showing the hold number of the first hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
The second hold number image showing the hold number of the second hold can be displayed on the effect display unit.
It is possible to execute the hold image generation effect when a new first hold image or a new second hold image is displayed.
It is possible to update the display of the first hold number image when there is a new ball entering the first starting port.
When there is a new ball entering the second starting port, it is possible to update the display of the second reserved number image.
It is possible to execute a hold image movement effect for moving the first hold image or the second hold image when a new variable display is started.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the hold image generation effect time and shorter than the hold image movement effect time.
The display update time of the first hold number image or the second hold number image is configured to be shorter than the fluctuation stop time of the first identification information or the fluctuation display stop time of the second identification information .
After the first effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit, the final display mode of the first effect symbol can be displayed on the effect display unit.
After the second effect symbol is variablely displayed on the effect display unit, the final display mode of the second effect symbol can be displayed on the effect display unit.
Within the period from the start to stop display of the variable display of the first identification information or within the period from the start to the stop display of the variable display of the second identification information, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. Is configured to
When the first identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the second identification information is variablely displayed in a certain variable display mode, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode and the second effect symbol corresponding to the certain variable display mode are displayed. It is configured to enable variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect symbol corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode are used. It is configured so that the final display mode of the design can be displayed.
The first hold number image and the second hold number image are configured so as not to be displayed in duplicate with the second effect symbol.
The display mode of the second effect symbol immediately before the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. The display mode of the second effect symbol after the start of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information is irrespective of the final display mode of the second effect symbol displayed in the variable display before the variable display. It is configured so that after displaying a certain type of the specified display mode among a plurality of predetermined types of the specified display mode, the display mode can be switched to a different type of the specified display mode from the certain type of the specified display mode. /> A pachinko game machine featuring that.

Images